HP Color LaserJet 3800 Printer Software Technical Reference, External ENWW Laser Jet Reference C00563734
User Manual: HP HP Color LaserJet 3800 Printer - Software Technical Reference
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Software Technical Reference HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Software Technical Reference Copyright and license Trademark credits ©2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Edition 1, 11/2005 Corel® is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited. EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are US registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Java™ is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PANTONE*® is *Pantone, Inc.'s checkstandard trademark for color. Pentium® is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Table of contents 1 Purpose and scope Introduction.............................................................................................................................................1 HP Color LaserJet 3800.........................................................................................................................4 Printing-system software........................................................................................................................7 System requirements.............................................................................................................7 Windows................................................................................................................7 Macintosh..............................................................................................................7 Linux......................................................................................................................7 UNIX......................................................................................................................8 Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................8 Standalone drivers ...............................................................................................8 Print driver support in other operating systems.....................................................8 Availability..............................................................................................................................9 Printing-system software on the Web...................................................................9 Printing-system software .....................................................................9 Software component availability ........................................................10 In-box printing-system software CDs .................................................................11 HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition ....................................11 HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition...................................12 CD versions........................................................................................12 HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................................18 HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.................................................................19 Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes................20 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide..............................................................................20 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................................21 2 Software description Introduction...........................................................................................................................................23 Printing-system software......................................................................................................................24 Windows software features..................................................................................................24 Printing system and installer...............................................................................24 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for Windows systems ..............................................................................24 Installer features.................................................................................26 HP LaserJet print drivers.....................................................................................27 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers.....................................27 Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems...........28 Macintosh printing-system software....................................................................................29 Mac OS 9 Classic support...................................................................................30 ENWW iii Macintosh printing system...................................................................................30 Driver Configuration for Windows.........................................................................................................31 Driver autoconfiguration.......................................................................................................31 Bidirectional communication................................................................................................31 Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................................31 Update Now.........................................................................................................................33 HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................................34 Lockable features ...............................................................................................35 Continuous export ..............................................................................................36 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.............................................................................................37 Color Access Control............................................................................................................................38 International Color Consortium profiles................................................................................................40 PANTONE color profiles.......................................................................................................................41 HP Easy Printer Care...........................................................................................................................42 Installation options...............................................................................................................42 Access.................................................................................................................................43 Find Other Printers..............................................................................................................44 My HP Printers screen – Overview tab................................................................................49 HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab....................................................................................53 Maintenance Tools..............................................................................................55 Troubleshooting Tools.........................................................................................58 HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................................59 Access to the HP EWS........................................................................................................59 The HP EWS frame.............................................................................................................60 Information tab.....................................................................................................................60 Links to off-product solutions...............................................................................................61 Device Status screen ..........................................................................................................61 Configuration Page .............................................................................................................62 Settings tab..........................................................................................................................64 Configure device..................................................................................................................65 Alerts....................................................................................................................................66 Security................................................................................................................................68 Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................69 Networking tab ....................................................................................................................70 Configuration section..........................................................................................72 Security section...................................................................................................72 Diagnostics section.............................................................................................72 Network settings .................................................................................................72 HP Printer Utility for Macintosh............................................................................................................73 Access to the HP Printer Utility............................................................................................73 Supplies Status....................................................................................................................76 Device Information...............................................................................................................78 HP Support..........................................................................................................................79 Upload Fonts.......................................................................................................................80 File Upload...........................................................................................................................81 Update Firmware.................................................................................................................82 Duplex mode........................................................................................................................83 Color Usage.........................................................................................................................83 Trays Configuration.............................................................................................................84 Lock Resources...................................................................................................................84 iv ENWW Stored Jobs..........................................................................................................................85 E-mail Alerts........................................................................................................................86 Network Settings..................................................................................................................87 Rendezvous Setting.............................................................................................................88 Supplies Management.........................................................................................................89 Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................90 Additional Settings...............................................................................................................93 HP Web Jetadmin................................................................................................................................94 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Introduction...........................................................................................................................................95 Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me.....................................................................97 Properties driver tabs...........................................................................................................97 Help system..........................................................................................................................................99 What's this? Help.................................................................................................................99 Context-sensitive Help.........................................................................................................99 Incompatible Options messages .........................................................................................99 Bubble Help.......................................................................................................................100 Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................101 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................102 Default Print Settings........................................................................................102 User Guide Print Settings .................................................................................105 Document Options.............................................................................................................105 Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................106 Automatically printing on both sides ................................................106 Manually printing on both sides........................................................107 Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................108 Booklet Printing.................................................................................................109 Book and Booklet Printing................................................................109 Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................110 Print Page Borders............................................................................................111 Page Order........................................................................................................111 Document preview image..................................................................................................112 Print Quality.......................................................................................................................112 Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver..................................112 Current Setting.................................................................................113 Graphic Settings...............................................................................113 Font Settings....................................................................................113 Output Settings.................................................................................113 Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver..................................113 Current Setting.................................................................................114 Graphic Settings...............................................................................114 Font Settings ...................................................................................114 Output Settings.................................................................................115 Effects tab features............................................................................................................................116 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................117 Fit To Page........................................................................................................................117 Print Document On ...........................................................................................117 Scale to Fit........................................................................................................117 % of Normal Size..............................................................................................118 ENWW v Document preview image..................................................................................................118 Watermarks.......................................................................................................................118 Current Watermarks..........................................................................................119 First Page Only.................................................................................................119 Edit…................................................................................................................119 Current Watermarks.........................................................................120 Watermark Message........................................................................121 Message Angle.................................................................................121 Document preview image.................................................................121 Font Attributes..................................................................................121 Default watermark settings...............................................................122 Paper tab features..............................................................................................................................124 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................125 Paper Options....................................................................................................................125 Size is................................................................................................................125 Custom..............................................................................................................126 Name................................................................................................127 Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................................128 Custom size (width and height controls)...........................................129 Custom width and height control limits.............................................129 Dynamic measurement units ...........................................................130 Close................................................................................................130 Source is...........................................................................................................130 Type is ..............................................................................................................131 Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................................132 Front Cover.......................................................................................132 First Page.........................................................................................133 Other Pages.....................................................................................134 Last Page.........................................................................................134 Back Cover.......................................................................................135 Document preview image..................................................................................................136 Product image....................................................................................................................136 Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................138 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................140 Status dialog box...............................................................................................................141 Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................141 Off.....................................................................................................................141 Proof and Hold .................................................................................................141 Private Job........................................................................................................141 Quick Copy .......................................................................................................142 Stored Job.........................................................................................................142 PIN.....................................................................................................................................143 Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................143 User Name.........................................................................................................................143 Job Name..........................................................................................................................143 Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................144 Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................144 Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................145 Basics tab features ............................................................................................................................146 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................147 vi ENWW Copies................................................................................................................................147 Orientation ........................................................................................................................147 Document preview image..................................................................................................148 About…..............................................................................................................................148 Color tab features...............................................................................................................................150 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................151 Color Options.....................................................................................................................151 Automatic..........................................................................................................151 Manual..............................................................................................................151 General.............................................................................................................152 Neutral Grays....................................................................................................153 Halftone.............................................................................................................153 Print in Grayscale..............................................................................................153 Color Themes....................................................................................................................154 RGB Color.........................................................................................................154 Default (sRGB).................................................................................154 Image Optimization (sRGB)..............................................................154 Adobe RGB (1998)...........................................................................154 None.................................................................................................154 Custom Profile..................................................................................155 CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)......................................................155 Default CMYK+.................................................................................155 SWOP...............................................................................................155 Euroscale..........................................................................................155 DIC...................................................................................................155 Custom Profile..................................................................................155 Document preview image..................................................................................................156 Configure tab features .......................................................................................................................157 Printer Model.....................................................................................................................158 Paper Handling Options.....................................................................................................159 Duplexing unit...................................................................................................159 Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................159 Mopier Enabled ................................................................................................160 Mopier mode and collation...............................................................160 Optional Paper Sources ...................................................................................160 Other Options....................................................................................................................161 Storage..............................................................................................................161 Fonts.................................................................................................................162 Allow Scaling from Large Paper........................................................................163 Alternative Letterhead Mode.............................................................................163 Ignore Application Collation..............................................................................163 Printer Memory..................................................................................................163 Include Types in Application Source List .........................................................164 Automatic configuration.....................................................................................................164 Printer image.....................................................................................................................164 HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features.......................................................................165 Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me.......................................165 PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800...................................................165 Help system.......................................................................................................................166 What's this Help................................................................................................166 ENWW vii Context-sensitive Help......................................................................................166 Paper tab features.............................................................................................................166 Paper size.........................................................................................................167 Layout...............................................................................................................168 Orientation.........................................................................................................169 Paper source.....................................................................................................169 Copies...............................................................................................................169 Unprintable Area…............................................................................................169 More Options….................................................................................................170 About …............................................................................................................170 Restore Defaults...............................................................................................171 Graphics tab features........................................................................................................171 Resolution ........................................................................................................172 Color Control.....................................................................................................172 Halftoning..........................................................................................................173 Special..............................................................................................................173 Scaling..............................................................................................................173 Restore Defaults...............................................................................................173 Fonts tab features..............................................................................................................174 Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table.........174 Font Substitution Table.....................................................................174 Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts...............................175 Always use TrueType fonts...............................................................................175 Send Fonts As…..............................................................................175 Restore Defaults...............................................................................176 Device Options tab features..............................................................................................176 Available printer memory..................................................................................178 Printer features..................................................................................................178 HPPJLEncoding...............................................................................179 Job storage.......................................................................................179 User Name.......................................................................................181 PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)..............................................................181 PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)..............................................................181 PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)..............................................................181 PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)..............................................................181 Print Color as Gray...........................................................................181 Collate..............................................................................................181 Fit to Page........................................................................................182 Color Options....................................................................................182 Color Themes for RGB Color...........................................................182 Color Themes for CMYK Color.........................................................183 Edge Control.....................................................................................183 Text Neutral Grays...........................................................................183 Text Halftone....................................................................................183 Graphic Neutral Grays......................................................................184 Graphic Halftone...............................................................................184 Photographs Neutral Grays..............................................................184 Photographs Halftone.......................................................................184 Watermark (Pages per Sheet)..........................................................184 Print Watermark................................................................................184 viii ENWW Watermark........................................................................................185 Watermark Font................................................................................185 Watermark Size................................................................................185 Watermark Angle..............................................................................185 Watermark Style...............................................................................186 Watermark Color..............................................................................186 Watermark Intensity..........................................................................186 Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................187 Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................187 Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................187 Installable options.............................................................................................188 Tray 3...............................................................................................188 Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing).....................................................188 Mopier Mode.....................................................................................189 Printer Hard Disk..............................................................................189 Job storage.......................................................................................189 VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product....................................................................................189 Restore Defaults...............................................................................................189 PostScript tab features......................................................................................................189 PostScript output format....................................................................................191 PostScript header..............................................................................................191 Print PostScript error information......................................................................191 PostScript timeout values..................................................................................191 Advanced….......................................................................................................192 PostScript Language Level...............................................................192 Bitmap compression.........................................................................192 Data format.......................................................................................193 Send CTRL+D before job.................................................................193 Send CTRL+D after job ...................................................................193 Restore Defaults...............................................................................................193 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows Introduction.........................................................................................................................................195 Access to print drivers........................................................................................................................197 Printing Preferences driver tabs........................................................................................197 Properties driver tabs.........................................................................................................198 Help system........................................................................................................................................199 What's this? Help...............................................................................................................199 Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................................199 Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................................199 Advanced tab features.......................................................................................................................201 Paper/Output.....................................................................................................................202 Copy Count ......................................................................................................202 Collated.............................................................................................................202 Graphic..............................................................................................................................203 Image Color Management.................................................................................203 True Type Font..................................................................................................203 Document Options.............................................................................................................203 Advanced Printing Features..............................................................................203 ENWW ix Print Optimizations ...........................................................................................204 PostScript Options............................................................................................204 Printer Features................................................................................................205 Layout Options..................................................................................................206 Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................................207 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................208 Default Print Settings........................................................................................208 User Guide Print Settings..................................................................................211 Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................................212 Paper Options....................................................................................................................212 Size is................................................................................................................213 Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................213 Name................................................................................................214 Paper size.........................................................................................214 Units.................................................................................................215 Custom width and height control limits.............................................215 Source is...........................................................................................................215 Type is...............................................................................................................216 Use Different Paper/Covers...............................................................................................217 Front Cover.......................................................................................................217 First Page..........................................................................................................218 Other Pages......................................................................................................219 Last Page..........................................................................................................220 Back Cover........................................................................................................221 Document preview image..................................................................................................223 HP Digital Imaging.............................................................................................................223 Effects tab features............................................................................................................................225 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................226 Resizing Options................................................................................................................226 Actual Size........................................................................................................226 Print Document On ...........................................................................................226 Scale to Fit .......................................................................................................226 % of Normal Size..............................................................................................227 Document preview image..................................................................................................227 Watermarks.......................................................................................................................228 Current watermarks...........................................................................................229 Watermark Message.........................................................................................229 Message Angle.................................................................................................229 Font Attributes...................................................................................................230 Default watermark settings................................................................................231 Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................232 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................233 Document Options.............................................................................................................233 Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................233 Automatically printing on both sides ................................................234 Manually printing on both sides........................................................234 Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................236 Booklet layout....................................................................................................236 Book and Booklet Printing................................................................236 Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................237 x ENWW Print Page Borders............................................................................................237 Page Order........................................................................................................237 Document preview image..................................................................................................238 Orientation.........................................................................................................................238 Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................240 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................243 Status group box................................................................................................................243 Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................243 Off.....................................................................................................................243 Proof and Hold .................................................................................................243 Private Job........................................................................................................244 Quick Copy........................................................................................................244 Stored Job.........................................................................................................244 Require PIN.......................................................................................................................245 Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................245 User Name.........................................................................................................................245 Job Name..........................................................................................................................246 Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................246 Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................247 Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................247 Color tab features...............................................................................................................................248 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................249 Color Options.....................................................................................................................249 Automatic..........................................................................................................249 Manual..............................................................................................................249 General.............................................................................................................250 Neutral Grays....................................................................................................251 Halftone.............................................................................................................251 Color Themes....................................................................................................................251 Default (sRGB)..................................................................................................252 Image Optimization (sRGB)..............................................................................252 Adobe RGB (1998)............................................................................................252 None..................................................................................................................252 Custom Profile...................................................................................................252 Document preview image..................................................................................................253 Services tab features..........................................................................................................................254 Internet Services................................................................................................................255 Device services..................................................................................................................255 Device Settings tab features..............................................................................................................256 Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................................................257 Font Substitution Table......................................................................................................257 External Fonts....................................................................................................................258 Installing external fonts.....................................................................................259 Removing external fonts...................................................................................259 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings............................................................................260 Available PostScript Memory............................................................................260 Output Protocol.................................................................................................260 Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................................261 Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................................261 Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray...............................................................261 ENWW xi Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray.......................................................261 Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts...............................................261 Job Timeout......................................................................................................261 Wait Timeout.....................................................................................................261 Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................................262 Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................................262 Installable Options.............................................................................................................262 Automatic Configuration....................................................................................262 Tray 3................................................................................................................263 Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................................................263 Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................263 Printer Memory..................................................................................................263 Printer Hard Disk...............................................................................................263 Job storage.......................................................................................................263 Mopier Mode.....................................................................................................263 Mopier mode and collation................................................................................264 Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only).....................................264 About tab features..............................................................................................................................266 5 Installing Windows printing-system components Introduction.........................................................................................................................................267 Font support.......................................................................................................................................268 Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................268 Default fonts.......................................................................................................................268 Installation instructions.......................................................................................................................274 General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................274 Installing from the printing-system CD..............................................................274 Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................274 Detailed Windows installation............................................................................................275 Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons..............................................275 Modifying a pre-existing installation..................................................................276 Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port................................276 Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ...............................276 Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.......................................................297 Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................298 Running the Installer Customization Wizard.....................................298 Dialogs..............................................................................................299 Distribution........................................................................................311 Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003..................................................................................................................311 Setting a default printer......................................................................................................312 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems Introduction.........................................................................................................................................313 Macintosh component descriptions....................................................................................................314 HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................................314 PDEs..................................................................................................................................314 HP Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................314 Install notes........................................................................................................................314 Online help.........................................................................................................................314 xii ENWW Screen fonts.......................................................................................................................315 Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................................316 Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS.......................316 Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic)..............................................................................................................................317 Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4.........................................................................318 Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.........................................................................325 Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x.................................................326 Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system........................................................................................327 In-box disk layout...............................................................................................................................328 Mac OS X Classic installation............................................................................................................329 Main Install dialog-box sequence......................................................................................329 Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................................330 Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................................330 7 Engineering Details Introduction.........................................................................................................................................335 File to E-mail utility.............................................................................................................................336 HP Easy Printer Care.........................................................................................................................338 Availability..........................................................................................................................338 Uninstall options................................................................................................................338 HP Software Update..........................................................................................................338 Media attributes..................................................................................................................................339 Media sources and destinations........................................................................................339 Media-source commands..................................................................................................339 Driver-supported media sizes............................................................................................340 Driver-supported media types............................................................................................341 Custom paper sizes...........................................................................................................342 Media-type commands......................................................................................................343 Remote firmware update ...................................................................................................................344 Determining the current level of firmware .........................................................................344 Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site......................................................344 Downloading the new firmware to the product...................................................................344 Printer messages during the firmware update ..................................................................345 Downloading custom color profiles....................................................................................346 Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser...............................................347 Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection...........................348 Windows operating systems.............................................................................348 Macintosh operating systems............................................................................349 Remote firmware update through a local Windows port ...................................................350 Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................350 Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................351 Remote firmware update through a USB port....................................................................352 Remote firmware update through a Windows network .....................................................352 Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .....................................................................353 Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility....................................................353 Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)...................354 Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .....................................................355 Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................355 ENWW xiii Printing print-ready documents .........................................................................................................357 Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser...................................................357 Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection...............................357 Windows operating systems.............................................................................358 Macintosh operating systems............................................................................359 Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port............................................................359 Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................360 Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.......................................................................................360 Print-ready file printing in a Windows network...................................................................361 Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems...........................................................................361 Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .........................................................361 Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems...................................................................362 Job-stream output .............................................................................................................362 PCL 6 raster compression ................................................................................................362 PJL/PJL Encoding.............................................................................................................363 Job tracking.......................................................................................................................363 Connectivity/Printing..........................................................................................................364 Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................364 HP Driver Preconfiguration ...............................................................................................365 Bundle support...................................................................................................................365 Tray and paper assignment...............................................................................................366 Installable options .............................................................................................................366 Printer services .................................................................................................................367 UI features ........................................................................................................................367 Help features ....................................................................................................................367 Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................368 Media sizes........................................................................................................................368 Media types.......................................................................................................................369 Job storage .......................................................................................................................369 Print quality and resolution................................................................................................370 Reordering Options............................................................................................................370 Resizing options................................................................................................................371 Color settings.....................................................................................................................371 Watermarks ......................................................................................................................372 Alternative source/paper type............................................................................................372 Printing destination............................................................................................................373 Finishing options and duplexing........................................................................................373 Other document options....................................................................................................373 Font support.......................................................................................................................374 Postscript-specific features................................................................................................374 Index...................................................................................................................................................................377 xiv ENWW List of tables Table 1-1 Table 1-2 Table 1-3 Table 1-4 Table 1-5 Table 1-6 Table 1-7 Table 1-8 Table 1-9 Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 4-1 Table 4-2 Table 4-3 Table 4-4 Table 4-5 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 6-1 Table 7-1 Table 7-2 Table 7-3 Table 7-4 Table 7-5 Table 7-6 Table 7-7 ENWW Software technical reference overview...........................................................................................1 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features.........................................................................................4 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer............................................10 CD AM – Americas and Europe....................................................................................................13 CD WE – Western Europe............................................................................................................14 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian..........................................................................15 CD EE – Eastern Europe..............................................................................................................16 CD AS – Asia................................................................................................................................17 Documentation availability............................................................................................................18 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.....................................................28 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..................................31 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share.........................................................32 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................33 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................36 Color access control tools.............................................................................................................38 Printer Usage Report....................................................................................................................56 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer..............................103 Page orientation..........................................................................................................................109 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................123 Name drop-down menu text strings............................................................................................128 PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................129 Close dialog-box text strings.......................................................................................................130 Printer-model configuration settings............................................................................................158 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings..................................................................................160 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer..............................209 PCL 6 custom media sizes..........................................................................................................215 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................231 Page orientation..........................................................................................................................236 Driver mopier mode and collation settings .................................................................................264 Default fonts................................................................................................................................268 Additional PS emulation fonts.....................................................................................................270 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.......................................................................317 HP Color LaserJet 3800 media sources and destinations .........................................................339 Media-source commands ...........................................................................................................339 Supported media sizes and attributes.........................................................................................340 Supported input media types......................................................................................................341 PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................342 Media-type commands................................................................................................................343 Troubleshooting a firmware update ............................................................................................345 xv Table 7-8 Table 7-9 Table 7-10 Table 7-11 Table 7-12 Table 7-13 Table 7-14 Table 7-15 Table 7-16 Table 7-17 Table 7-18 Table 7-19 Table 7-20 Table 7-21 Table 7-22 Table 7-23 Table 7-24 Table 7-25 Table 7-26 Table 7-27 Table 7-28 Table 7-29 Table 7-30 Table 7-31 Table 7-32 Table 7-33 Table 7-34 Table 7-35 Table 7-36 Table 7-37 xvi Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................345 Update messages.......................................................................................................................346 Driver support for the job-stream output feature.........................................................................362 PCL 6 color raster compression support ....................................................................................362 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding..........................................................................363 Driver support for job tracking.....................................................................................................363 Driver support for connectivity features ......................................................................................364 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features ......................................................364 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................365 Bundle support............................................................................................................................365 Tray and paper assignment........................................................................................................366 Driver support for installable options...........................................................................................366 Printer services (Services tab)....................................................................................................367 Driver support for UI features......................................................................................................367 Driver support for Help features..................................................................................................367 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets.....................................................................................368 Driver support for media sizes....................................................................................................368 Driver support for media types....................................................................................................369 Driver support for the job-storage features ................................................................................369 Print-quality and resolution features ...........................................................................................370 Driver support for the reordering options....................................................................................370 Resizing options..........................................................................................................................371 Color settings..............................................................................................................................371 Driver support for watermarks feature ........................................................................................372 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature.........................................................372 Driver support for the printing-destination feature.......................................................................373 Duplexing....................................................................................................................................373 Other document options..............................................................................................................373 Font support................................................................................................................................374 Driver support for postscript-specific features ............................................................................374 ENWW List of figures Figure 1-1 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 2-18 Figure 2-19 Figure 2-20 Figure 2-21 Figure 2-22 Figure 2-23 Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25 Figure 2-26 Figure 2-27 Figure 2-28 Figure 2-29 Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31 Figure 2-32 Figure 2-33 Figure 2-34 Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-37 Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39 ENWW Installation software CD printer-documentation screen................................................................18 Installation software CD browser..................................................................................................25 My HP Printers screen..................................................................................................................44 Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen...................................................................................................45 Advanced Search Settings screen................................................................................................45 Searching for printers, please wait.. screen..................................................................................46 Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen.......................................................................................46 Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen................................................................................................47 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen........................................................................................47 Alert Settings screen.....................................................................................................................48 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer......................................................................49 Overview tab.................................................................................................................................50 HP Easy Printer Care Help screen................................................................................................51 Supplies Ordering screen..............................................................................................................52 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen...........................................................52 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen..............................................................................................53 Support tab....................................................................................................................................54 Support Help screen.....................................................................................................................55 Welcome to HP Software Update screen......................................................................................57 Checking for updates… screen.....................................................................................................57 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen.........................................................................62 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3.....................................................63 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3.....................................................64 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3.....................................................64 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen.........................................................................66 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2................................................................................67 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2................................................................................68 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen.......................................................................................69 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen....................................................................71 Select Printer screen – printer not selected..................................................................................74 Connection Type screen...............................................................................................................74 Select Printer screen – printer selected........................................................................................75 Printer Status screen.....................................................................................................................76 Supplies Status screen.................................................................................................................76 Supplies Information screen..........................................................................................................77 Order Supplies link........................................................................................................................77 Paper Status screen......................................................................................................................78 Device Information screen............................................................................................................79 HP Online Support screen............................................................................................................79 HP Instant Support link.................................................................................................................80 xvii Figure 2-40 Figure 2-41 Figure 2-42 Figure 2-43 Figure 2-44 Figure 2-45 Figure 2-46 Figure 2-47 Figure 2-48 Figure 2-49 Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51 Figure 2-52 Figure 2-53 Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 xviii Upload Fonts screen.....................................................................................................................81 File Upload screen........................................................................................................................82 Print Color Usage Job Log screen................................................................................................83 Trays Configuration screen...........................................................................................................84 Lock Resources screen.................................................................................................................85 Enable Job Storing screen............................................................................................................86 E-mail Alerts screen......................................................................................................................87 IP Settings screen.........................................................................................................................87 Rendezvous screen......................................................................................................................88 Replace Supplies screen..............................................................................................................89 Restrict Color Use screen.............................................................................................................90 Restrict Color Use – User tab.......................................................................................................91 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................91 Restrict Color Use – Application tab.............................................................................................92 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................92 Additional Settings screen.............................................................................................................93 A typical constraint message with an OK button...........................................................................99 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon.......................................................................................100 The default Finishing tab.............................................................................................................101 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................108 Printing a booklet........................................................................................................................110 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................111 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver...........................................112 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver...........................................114 Effects tab...................................................................................................................................116 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right).......................................117 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................120 Paper tab ....................................................................................................................................124 Paper Options group box (default)..............................................................................................125 Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................126 Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................132 First Page options ......................................................................................................................133 Other Pages options...................................................................................................................134 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................135 Back Cover setting......................................................................................................................135 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................140 Basics tab....................................................................................................................................146 About This Driver dialog box.......................................................................................................148 Color tab......................................................................................................................................150 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................152 Configure tab...............................................................................................................................157 More Configuration Options dialog box ......................................................................................161 Configure Font Cards dialog box................................................................................................162 Paper tab.....................................................................................................................................167 Custom-designed size dialog box...............................................................................................168 Page dimensions in inches.........................................................................................................169 Unprintable Area dialog box........................................................................................................170 More Paper Options dialog box...................................................................................................170 About dialog box.........................................................................................................................171 Graphics tab................................................................................................................................172 ENWW Figure 3-35 Figure 3-36 Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38 Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7 Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9 Figure 4-10 Figure 4-11 Figure 4-12 Figure 4-13 Figure 4-14 Figure 4-15 Figure 4-16 Figure 4-17 Figure 4-18 Figure 4-19 Figure 4-20 Figure 4-21 Figure 4-22 Figure 4-23 Figure 4-24 Figure 4-25 Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6 Figure 5-7 Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11 Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13 Figure 5-14 Figure 5-15 Figure 5-16 Figure 5-17 Figure 5-18 ENWW Image Color Management dialog box.........................................................................................173 Fonts tab.....................................................................................................................................174 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................175 Send Fonts As… dialog box........................................................................................................175 Device Options tab......................................................................................................................177 PostScript tab..............................................................................................................................190 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box....................................................................................192 An Incompatible Print Settings message....................................................................................200 The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................201 Paper/Quality tab........................................................................................................................207 Paper Options group box............................................................................................................212 Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................214 Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................217 First Page options.......................................................................................................................219 Other Pages options...................................................................................................................220 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................221 Back Cover options.....................................................................................................................222 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box........................................................................................223 Effects tab...................................................................................................................................225 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ......................................227 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................228 Finishing tab................................................................................................................................232 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................235 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................238 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................242 Color tab......................................................................................................................................248 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................250 Services tab................................................................................................................................254 Device Settings tab.....................................................................................................................256 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................258 HP Font Installer dialog box .......................................................................................................259 About tab.....................................................................................................................................266 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box......................................................275 Cancel dialog box........................................................................................................................275 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................276 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Setup Wizard dialog box ...........................................277 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System...........................................................................277 Software License Agreement dialog box.....................................................................................278 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................278 Searching dialog box...................................................................................................................279 Firewall Detected dialog box.......................................................................................................280 Printer Not Found dialog box......................................................................................................281 Printers Found dialog box...........................................................................................................282 Printer Found dialog box.............................................................................................................283 Confirm Network Settings dialog box..........................................................................................283 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box..........................................................................................284 Check Printer Connection dialog box..........................................................................................285 Specify Printer dialog box...........................................................................................................285 Printer Settings dialog box..........................................................................................................286 Set Port Name dialog box...........................................................................................................287 xix Figure 5-19 Figure 5-20 Figure 5-21 Figure 5-22 Figure 5-23 Figure 5-24 Figure 5-25 Figure 5-26 Figure 5-27 Figure 5-28 Figure 5-29 Figure 5-30 Figure 5-31 Figure 5-32 Figure 5-33 Figure 5-34 Figure 5-35 Figure 5-36 Figure 5-37 Figure 5-38 Figure 5-39 Figure 5-40 Figure 5-41 Figure 5-42 Figure 5-43 Figure 5-44 Figure 5-45 Figure 5-46 Figure 5-47 Figure 5-48 Figure 5-49 Figure 5-50 Figure 5-51 Figure 5-52 Figure 5-53 Figure 6-1 Figure 6-2 Figure 6-3 Figure 6-4 Figure 6-5 Figure 6-6 Figure 6-7 Figure 6-8 Figure 6-9 Figure 6-10 Figure 6-11 Figure 6-12 Figure 6-13 Figure 6-14 Figure 6-15 xx Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box............................................................................................288 Installation Type dialog box.........................................................................................................288 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................289 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................290 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................290 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................291 Ready to Install dialog box .........................................................................................................292 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab......................................................................................................292 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................293 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................294 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................294 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................295 HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box..........................................................................295 Test Page dialog box..................................................................................................................296 HP Registration screen...............................................................................................................297 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen..................299 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................299 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box..................................................................300 Language dialog box...................................................................................................................300 Printer Port dialog box.................................................................................................................301 Browse for Printer dialog box......................................................................................................302 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................302 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box...................................................................................................303 Port Creation Options dialog box................................................................................................304 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................304 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................305 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................306 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................306 Custom Installer Location dialog box..........................................................................................307 Ready to Create Installer dialog box...........................................................................................307 Printer Properties General tab....................................................................................................308 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................309 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................309 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................310 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................310 Printer Browser screen................................................................................................................318 Installable Options screen...........................................................................................................319 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab............................................................................321 More Printers screen...................................................................................................................322 IP Printer tab...............................................................................................................................323 Printer List screen.......................................................................................................................324 Select Printer screen...................................................................................................................325 hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon.................................................................................................330 hp LaserJet Software screen......................................................................................................330 HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon............................................................................................331 Authenticate dialog box...............................................................................................................331 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box ..................................................331 License dialog box......................................................................................................................332 Easy Install dialog box................................................................................................................332 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) .......................................................................333 ENWW Figure 6-16 Figure 6-17 Figure 6-18 Figure 7-1 ENWW Installing dialog box ....................................................................................................................333 LaserJet ReadMe icon................................................................................................................334 Installation success message.....................................................................................................334 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached........................................................337 xxi xxii ENWW Purpose and scope 1 Purpose and scope Introduction This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software. This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer end users, as appropriate. The following information is included in this STR: ● Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications ● Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components ● Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, including engineering details The following table describes the structure of this STR. Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview Chapter Content Chapter 1, Purpose and scope This chapter contains basic information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer and its software: ● Overview of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer ● Printing-system software overview, including the following topics: ● Chapter 2, Software description ● System requirements ● Supported operating systems ● Availability HP LaserJet software documentation This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and print drivers. This chapter also contains general information about other software features, including the following topics: ENWW ● Driver configuration for Windows® ● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool Introduction 1 Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued) Chapter Content Chapter 3, HP traditional print drivers for Windows ● International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles ● PANTONE*® color profiles ● HP Easy Printer Care (a new HP software feature for Windows operating systems) ● HP Embedded Web Server ● HP Printer Utility for Macintosh (a new HP software feature for Mac OS X) ● HP Web Jetadmin This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me). This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics: Chapter 4, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ● Releasing a job-storage print job ● Deleting a job-storage print job This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics: ● Releasing a job-storage print job ● Deleting a job-storage print job Chapter 5, Installing Windows printingsystem components This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer in Windows operating systems by using various installation methods. Chapter 6, Installation for Macintosh operating systems This chapter provides Instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer in Macintosh operating systems. Chapter 7, Engineering details This chapter contains information about the following special topics: ● File to E-mail utility ● HP Easy Printer Care ● Media attributes ● Remote firmware update ● Printing print-ready documents ● Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of contents. An index is provided in the back of this STR. 2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Purpose and scope Additional detailed information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software is published in an addendum to this STR. The following information is available only in the addendum: ENWW ● Lists of installed files ● System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys ● Descriptions of known software issues and solutions Introduction 3 HP Color LaserJet 3800 The following table contains descriptions of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features that are discussed in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions. Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features Models Performance Memory ● Base model: HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (part number Q5982A) ● HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer (part number Q5983A) ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dn printer (part number Q5984A) ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer (part number Q5985A) ● Prints up to 22 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-sized paper and up to 21 ppm for A4-sized paper in monochrome and up to 15 ppm in color. ● First page prints in 12.5 seconds or less. The printer can be set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each day. ● 64 megabytes (MB) of memory for the HP Color LaserJet 3800; 128 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 3800n; and 256 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models. Memory specification: The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer uses 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of random-access memory (RAM). User interface Supported printer personalities Hard-disk features 4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ● Two open EIO slots ● Can be expanded to 512 MB of double data-rate synchronous random access memory (DDR-SRAM) plus 32 MB of memory on the formatter board ● Optional hard-disk drive can be added in an EIO slot ● Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel ● Enhanced Help with animated graphics ● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (network-connected printers) ● HP PCL 6 ● HP PCL 5c ● PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation ● Portable document format (PDF) ● Full job-storage features ● Proof and hold ● Private jobs ENWW Environmental features Fonts Paper handling ENWW ● Quick copy ● Stored jobs ● Mopier mode ● Personal identification number (PIN) printing ● Fonts and forms ● Sleep-mode setting ● High content of recyclable components and materials ● Energy Star® compliant ● Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive compliant ● Internal fonts are available for both printer command language (PCL) and postscript emulation. ● Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType® format are available on the printing-system software CD ● HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the disk. ● Prints on media sizes from 148 mm x 210 mm (5.83 inches x 8.27 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 inches x 14 inches) (Legal size) ● Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover stock. ● Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) in weight ● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock, labels, and envelopes ● Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the appropriate glossy-media type ● Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media ● Standard 250-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media ● Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media ● Standard 250-sheet face-down output bin ● The duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing (duplexing) is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printers. ● Automatic duplexing of 120-g/m2 (32-lb) paper at full speed produces up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute. HP Color LaserJet 3800 Purpose and scope Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features (continued) 5 Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features (continued) Accessories Connectivity Supplies 6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ● Optional printer hard disk, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as additional features for job storage ● Dual inline memory modules (DIMM) ● Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware upgrades ● Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional connectivity (Network connection through an HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3800n, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn, and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn models.) ● Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network connectivity without using an EIO slot ● Bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE 1284Bcompliant); available with the optional 1284B parallel EIO card (part number J7972G) ● The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining. ● High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic tonerseal removal feature ● The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when a cartridge is installed. ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the HP Embedded Web Server ENWW Purpose and scope Printing-system software This section contains information about the following topics: ● System requirements ● Supported operating systems ● Availability System requirements The section lists system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printingsystem software on each of these supported operating systems: ● Windows ● Macintosh ● Linux ● UNIX Windows ● Pentium® or compatible processor ● Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000: 333-MHz processor with 64 MB RAM Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM ● Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM (Standard Edition) and 220 MB of available hard-disk space ● Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640x480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA]) ● Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection ● CD-ROM drive or internet connection Macintosh ● PowerPC processor ● Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), with 96 MB RAM ● Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later, with 128 MB RAM and 160 MB of available hard-disk space ● CD-ROM drive or internet connection Linux For information about Linux support for the printer, see the following HP Linux Web site: ● ENWW www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting Printing-system software 7 UNIX For information about UNIX® support for the printer, see the following Web sites: ● www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software ● www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts Supported operating systems Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality. Throughout this STR, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise. Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network capabilities. If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 has not been tested with and is not supported in the Windows 3.1x or Windows 95 operating systems. The Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Print drivers for the product are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the Web. Other drivers might work on the printer, but some print-driver features and functions might not be available. For more information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 Standalone drivers The following operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software, including the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers: ● Windows 98 ● Windows Me ● Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2) ● Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit) ● Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit) ● Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit) Print driver support in other operating systems The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is also supported in the following operating environments: 8 ● Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) ● Mac OS X (V10.1.5 or later) ● Linux. For more information, go to the following Web site: Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Purpose and scope www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting ● UNIX. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software ● UNIX model scripts. Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts. ● Windows Terminal Server ● Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site: h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”. ● Windows Cluster Server 8 ● HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site: h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/ ● Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/ ● SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/sap/print ● HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/inpw_software Availability This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from HP fulfillment centers. Printing-system software on the Web All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web. Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases. NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This STR does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel. Printing-system software The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software is available for download at www.hp.com/go/ clj3800_software. ENWW Printing-system software 9 NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If the computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available on the Web at www.hp.com/go/ clj3800_software. For information about driver support in various operating systems, see Supported operating systems. For more information about installing print drivers for Windows, see Installing Windows printingsystem components. Software component availability The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system. These drivers are available at the HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software NOTE All of the listed components are available both on the printing-system software CD and on the Web, except for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components, which are available only on the Web. Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Component Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP (32bit) Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (64-bit) HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver, and HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x Macintosh Drivers HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x PS Emulation Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x Common Windows Installer x x Installer Customization Wizard x x CD Browser x x Add Printer Wizard install x x Web Registration x x Installer 10 x Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) postscript printer definition (PPD) files x Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW In-box printing-system software CDs The software CD for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printing-system software on the computer. This section describes the files that are available on the software CD and provides additional information about support and availability. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the following operating systems: ● Windows ● Macintosh The files in each partition include documentation files and files that are required in order to install and uninstall the printing-system components. HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files: ● Autorun ● Drivers ● Fonts ● HP Easy Printer Care ● HP Print Usage Report ● hw ● Manuals ● PortMonitor ● System32 ● Temp ● WebReg The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories: ● Drivers ● Manuals NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD. To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive. ENWW Printing-system software 11 Purpose and scope NOTE The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a new driver. It has not been available on legacy HP LaserJet products. HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language and reside in the following directories: ● Mac OS X (installer for the Mac OS X operating system) ● Mac OS 9 (installer for the Mac OS 9 operating system) ● PDF NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD. CD versions The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows: ● ● ● 12 CD AM – Americas and Europe (Part No. Q5982-60101): ● CA = Catalan (Català) ● DE = German (Deutsch) ● EN = English ● ES = Spanish (Español) ● FR = French (Français) ● IT = Italian (Italiano) ● NL = Dutch (Nederland) ● PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português) CD WE – Western Europe (Part No. Q5982-60102): ● DA = Danish (Dansk) ● EN = English ● FI = Finnish (Suomi) ● HE = Hebrew ● NO = Norwegian (Norsk) ● SV = Swedish (Svenska) CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (Part No. Q5982-60103): ● AR = Arabic ● EN = English ● EL = Greek ● FR = French (Français) Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ● RU = Russian (Russ) ● TR = Turkish (Turkçe) Purpose and scope ● ● CD EE – Eastern Europe (Part No. Q5982-60104): ● CS = Czech (Cesky) ● EN = English ● HU = Hungarian (Magyar) ● PL = Polish (Polski) ● SK = Slovak CD AS – Asia (Part No. Q5982-60105): ● EN = English ● ID = Indonesian (Bahasa) ● JA = Japanese ● KO = Korean ● TH = Thai ● ZHCN = Simplified Chinese ● ZHTW = Traditional Chinese Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software components that are supported in each language. NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/ regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs. Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe Component ENWW CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x x x Common Windows Installer x x x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x Printing-system software 13 Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe (continued) Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT CD Browser x x x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x x x x x Printer Usage Report x x x x x x x HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x Fonts x x x x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3 800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3 800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe 14 Component DA EN FI HE NO SV HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x Common Windows Installer x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x x Printer Usage Report x x x x HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope x ENWW Component DA EN FI HE NO SV HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x Fonts x x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 PrintingSystem Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x x x x Purpose and scope Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe (continued) Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian Component AR EN EL FR RU TR HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x Common Windows Installer x x x x x x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x Printer Usage Report x x HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x Fonts ENWW x x x HP Web Registration x x x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x Printing-system software 15 Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (continued) Component AR EN EL FR RU TR HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 PrintingSystem Install Notes x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe 16 Component CS EN HU PL SK HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x Common Windows Installer x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x CD Browser x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x Printer Usage Report x x HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x Fonts x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope x x ENWW Component CS EN HU PL SK Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 PrintingSystem Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide Purpose and scope Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe (continued) x Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia ENWW Component EN HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver ID JA KO TH ZHCN ZHTW x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x Common Windows Installer x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x Printer Usage Report x HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x Fonts x HP Web Registration x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 PrintingSystem Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x Printing-system software 17 HP LaserJet documentation The following figure shows the printer-documentation screen, which appears when you click Printer Documentation on the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD. Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer-documentation screen The following table lists the availability of HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system documentation by operating system. Table 1-9 Documentation availability 18 Document Windows 98/ Me Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003 Macintosh HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ● Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser. ● Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. ● Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file formats: ● Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. ● Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen. ● Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web browser opens the file on the computer screen. ● Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in Microsoft Word or Microsoft WordPad. HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide describes the basic product features. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click User Guide (Interactive). The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: CLJ3800_USE_XXWW.CHM NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ3800_USE_FRWW.CHM The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print. To print the guide, follow these steps: ENWW 1. In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens. 3. Print the guide. HP LaserJet documentation 19 Purpose and scope Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location: You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\ folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: CLJ3800_USE_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ3800_USE_FRWW.PDF When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes The Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes (in .HTM format) contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click Install Notes. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\ folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: CLJ3800_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the document is CLJ3800_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM. HP Embedded Web Server User Guide The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status, settings, and networking for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 20 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click Embedded Web Server Guide. Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Purpose and scope You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\ folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: CLJ3800_EWS_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is CLJ3800_EWS_FRWW.PDF. When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information about connecting the product directly to a network. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click HP Jetdirect Guide. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\ folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF. When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 21 22 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Software description Software description 2 Introduction The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds to that system. NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. This chapter contains information about the following topics: ENWW ● Printing-system software ● Driver Configuration for Windows ● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool ● Color Access Control ● International Color Consortium profiles ● PANTONE color profiles ● HP Easy Printer Care ● HP Embedded Web Server ● HP Printer Utility for Macintosh ● HP Web Jetadmin Introduction 23 Printing-system software This section contains information about the following topics: ● Windows software features ● Macintosh printing-system software Windows software features This section contains information about the following topics: ● Printing system and installer ● HP LaserJet print drivers Printing system and installer The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the software CD that came with the product. HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for Windows systems For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me), Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD provides an interactive CD browser that you can use to install the print drivers and related components, and to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader software, and optional HP software. The following figure shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in a CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, follow these steps to open the CD browser: 24 1. Click Start. 2. Click Run. 3. Click Browse…. and navigate to the root directory of the software CD. 4. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move the cursor over each option, a description of the option appears above the product image. NOTE The options on your product might differ from the illustration. Install Printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Basic Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install. Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP Color LaserJet 3800 installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation. HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care. This printer maintenance tool helps track and maintain the printers by providing information about status, alert notifications, usage, and supplies for one or more printers. Register Product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters. ENWW Printing-system software 25 Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP Color LaserJet 3800 user documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option: ● User Guide (Interactive) ● User Guide (Printer Friendly) ● Install Notes ● Embedded Web Server Guide ● HP Jetdirect Guide ● Color Printing Access and Usage NOTE If the system on which you are installing the product does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, click any of the links to documentation that is in portable document format (.PDF) to open a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader that runs from the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site: www.adobe.com. Support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, you can view a list of optional software programs and links to HP Web sites. The following options are available: ● Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browserbased network-management tool. ● Click Color Printing Access and Usage to enable or disable color printing and to track color usage. ● Click Color Matching Information for information about simulating PANTONE* MATCHING SYSTEM colors and installing International Color Consortium (ICC) color profiles for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. ● Click Supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supplies. ● Click Product Information for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer support information and updates. ● Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores. Installer features The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. 26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW ● The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD features an interactive software interface. See HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for Windows systems. ● Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product in a single process. ● The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD also includes the following features: ● The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility ● The HP Customization Utility for custom installations All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 3800 series printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Basic Installation, Full Installation, or Custom Installation. HP LaserJet print drivers HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments: ● Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me ● Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit) ● Apple Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), and Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later) In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software, see the Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes on the printing-system software CD. All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in chapters 3 and 4 of this STR. HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printingsystem software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software ENWW Printing-system software 27 Software description The common installer offers the following features: The following drivers are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD: ● The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● The HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me ● The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98, and Windows Me ● The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (the PS Emulation Driver) for Windows 98 and Windows Me NOTE If you select a Full Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, and the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for Windows 98 and Windows Me. Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Operating System1 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation Windows 98 and Windows Me X X X Windows 2000 X X X Windows XP X X X Windows Server 2003 X X X Macintosh OS 1 X Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information about the features that are available. Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is installed. NOTE For a list of HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product-support information, go to: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers. If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information: 28 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW 3. Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows 2000). 4. Right-click the printer icon. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the About tab. If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, follow these steps to gain access to the print driver version number: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage ● Basics ● Color ● Configure The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. To gain access to the print-driver version number, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click About. Macintosh printing-system software This section discusses the following topics: ENWW Printing-system software 29 Software description The Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver. ● Mac OS 9 Classic support ● Macintosh printing system Mac OS 9 Classic support HP does not fully support Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic). It is not a native operating system but a virtual operating system running on top of Mac OS X (HP software is designed and tested for native operating systems). Additionally, no support is offered for Virtual PC, which is also a virtual operating system. Information that HP has about specific issues related to the Mac OS X Classic environment or printdriver files can be relayed to customers. At this time, support offered for Mac OS 9 Classic is on a "best effort" basis. HP understands that because certain Apple computers might not offer native Mac OS 9, Classic is the only option. "Best effort" support will attempt the following: ● Installation of the software and hardware ● Test installation to verify that the software and hardware work ● Limited troubleshooting When problems arise within the Mac OS X Classic environment, HP uses the following resources to resolve the problem: ● Internal resources, such as knowledge-base systems, engineers, and the resource desk ● Apple support ● The Web ● Known solutions If these resources do not resolve the problem, contact Apple or the virtual-operating-system vendor. While issues that occur with virtual operating systems are not supported, HP continues to offer full support for its products in native Mac OS 9, where the supplied product software is designed to support Mac OS 9 and is within the normal support period. Macintosh printing system The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later) and the Apple LaserWriter driver for Mac OS 9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following are components that can be installed: 30 ● The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later ● SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS X Classic) ● LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X) ● The HP Printer Selector (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later) ● Install notes Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, printer hard disk, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). Software description Driver autoconfiguration Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances: ● When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) ● When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard. Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Connection type Add Printer Wizard install Common installer Network Yes Yes Direct connection No Yes Bidirectional communication In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly. Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP Color LaserJet 3800. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer. Enterprise AutoConfiguration Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the printingsystem software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver. ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 31 If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update Now feature is used. If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer configuration changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now. The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication. Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share Method Installer Connection type Direct connect Parallel Network Jetdirect Microsoft Share1 98 Me NT 4.0 2000 XP 2000/XP host with 2000/XP client NT 4.0 host with NT 4.0 client TCP/IP x x x x x x x2 IPX/SPX x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (HP) x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (MS) x x x x x x x2 IPX/SPX (HP) x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP x x x x x x IPX/SPX x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (HP) x x x x x x x2 x x x x2 x x x x2 USB Standard Add Printer Microsoft Windows Direct connect Parallel Network Jetdirect USB Standard TCP/IP (MS) IPX/SPX (HP) 1 2 32 x x x This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client. In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments Method Connection type Novell Netware 5.x Netware 4.x Installer Direct connect Bindery queue NDS queue Bindery queue NT 4.0 x x x x Parallel Network Jetdirect TCP/IP IPX/SPX Standard TCP/IP (HP) TCP/IP (MS1) IPX/SPX (HP) 1 Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare. Update Now If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For example, if the product is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the new product configuration. The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab if you are using an HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and on the Device Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. NOTE The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver. To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, follow these steps: ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click Device Settings. 7. If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options. Driver Configuration for Windows 33 Software description USB 8. In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now. 9. Click OK to save the setting. NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts. To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click Device Settings. 7. Click the Configure tab. 8. In the Automatic Configuration group box, click Update Now. 9. Click OK to save the setting. HP Driver Preconfiguration HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured: ● device settings ● printing-preferences settings The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that access to all of the product accessories through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured. HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the product, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings). The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: 34 ● driver acquisition ● driver preconfiguration ● driver installation and deployment Chapter 2 Software description ENWW These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration. ● HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows software program is used. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw ● The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html ● HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer. For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw Lockable features The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings: ● Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False. ● Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled. ● Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports (see Media attributes in the Engineering Details chapter). ● Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2. When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users. Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked. ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 35 Software description The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration: Continuous export The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the orientation is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models. NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured. The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration. Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration 1 36 Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver Yes Yes N/A1 N/A N/A HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A PS Emulation Driver No No N/A N/A N/A HP PCL 6 Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes HP PCL 5 Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes PS Emulation Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that you can use to determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool: 1. Open an Internet browser. 2. Go to the following Web site: 1. Open an Internet browser. 2. Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site: Software description www.hp.com/go/drivercheck www.hp.com/go/bsc 3. Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar. 4. Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool. When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the products that are currently installed on the computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. The tool then verifies whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for the HP product, and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for the product. If an updated driver is available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking it. The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer. ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 37 Color Access Control The HP Color LaserJet 3800 has the ability to monitor and control color print-job use. The following table shows various tools that can be used to control color-printing access. Table 2-6 Color access control tools Tool Description HP Embedded Web Server The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a Web-browserbased utility that provides an interface to the printer that you can use to change printer settings, including color access control settings. No special software needs to be installed or configured. It allows you to set color printing restrictions and view a log of color printing use. The HP EWS is designed for one-to-one printer configuration monitoring and management. For more information, see HP Embedded Web Server in this chapter. HP Web Jetadmin The HP Web Jetadmin provides an interface to the printer through a Web browser on single network-administration servers. Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirectconnected products within an intranet. For more information, see the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin Color usage job log The color usage job log shows color and monochrome print job statistics for a printer. For more information, see HP Easy Printer Care in this chapter. HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, use the HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver to limit the color printing capabilities of the HP Color LaserJet 3800. The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a full-featured print driver. For more information , see HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows in this STR. Product control panel Use the product control panel to restrict color use in networkconnected printers. For more information, see the following procedure To restrict color-printing access to a network-connected HP Color LaserJet 3800 from the product control panel, follow these steps: 38 (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press . (the up button) and 3. Press and Chapter 2 (the down button) to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press to scroll to SYSTEM SETUP, and then press Software description . ENWW 4. Press and to scroll to RESTRICT COLOR USE, and then press 5. Press and to scroll to one of the following options: . ENABLE COLOR. This is the default setting. Use of color-printing features is unrestricted. ● COLOR IF ALLOWED. Network administrators can use this setting to allow color-printing to certain users and restrict it for other users. User privileges can be set using HP EWS. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. ● DISABLE COLOR. This setting denies the use of color-printing features to all users. Software description ● ENWW Color Access Control 39 International Color Consortium profiles HP provides cyan-magenta-yellow-black (CMYK) (HP3800C.ICM) and standard red-green-blue (sRGB) (HP3800R.ICM) International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The CMYK profile can only be used with a postscript driver; the sRGB profile can be used with any of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers. The profiles are available at the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 The ICC profiles describe the way color will be interpreted in the default CMYK and RGB modes. These profiles can be used for color conversions in a color-managed workflow. The sRGB profile matches the default RGB mode (sRGB), which is enabled with the Default (sRGB) or Color setting in either a PCL or postscript driver. The printer interprets CMYK data according to the Specifications for Web Offset Publications (SWOP) simulation when Default CMYK+ is the selected CMYK Color setting in the postscript driver, and a more accurate SWOP rendering can be produced by selecting the SWOP setting. This standard defines how a particular set of CMYK ink colors should behave. Emulation for Dainippon Press (DIC) and Euro-standard CMYK inks used in Asia and Europe are also available and can be selected from the print driver. 40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW PANTONE color profiles ● PS Emulation Unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● PS Emulation Driver in Windows 98 and Windows Me When SWOP is selected as the CMYK Color setting, these CMYK values provides a good reproduction of the PANTONE* 4C spot-color simulations. PANTONE* provides device- and software-specific palettes for some HP Color LaserJet products. Using the custom colors in these palettes can provide an alternative match to the 4C spot-color simulation. However, files that use these palettes are not portable to other devices. PANTONE* Application Palettes are available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 Vector graphics, such as company logos that are created in PANTONE* Application Palettes, can be imported into Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or other Microsoft Office software programs. The color program must create an encapsulated postscript (.EPS) file of the image that will be imported. Use the Insert file function to import the file into the Office document. NOTE Cutting and pasting from the clipboard does not work. These tasks do not preserve the PANTONE* name or the CMYK palette value. ENWW PANTONE color profiles 41 Software description Most software programs that support the use of PANTONE* colors for graphic objects will include the PANTONE* name in the postscript output along with the color values that are assigned to the object. For best results, select a software program that uses PANTONE* palette in a CMYK workspace, and print with one of the following postscript drivers: HP Easy Printer Care HP Easy Printer Care is a new standalone software program that manages from one to 15 printers. It enables you to view the status of all HP printers, set up printer and status alerts, generate printer usage reports, and reorder supplies. NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare Installation options The following methods are available for installing HP Easy Printer Care software: ● Standalone installation, from the Web. This method is recommended for ensuring that the latest version of HP Easy Printer Care is installed. The software is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare ● CD Browser. From the main installation screen of the software CD, select HP Easy Printer Care. This method is recommended in cases where HP Easy Printer Care software is the only component that you want to install. NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare ● Full installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. This method installs the full set of drivers and software, including status, alerting, and troubleshooting tools (HP Easy Printer Care). This method is recommended for computers in a direct-connect or a home/small network environment. NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare ● Custom installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. HP Easy Printer Care is one of the components that can be selected for installation. NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare ● Next Steps, during installation. After the drivers have been installed using the printing system installer, a dialog appears that provides an opportunity to install HP Easy Printer Care, if it is not already installed. NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare 42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW To install HP Easy Printer Care directly from the printing-system software CD, follow these steps: NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click HP Easy Printer Care Software. The HP Easy Printer Care screen appears. 3. Click OK to proceed with the installation. Software description 1. When you perform a default installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is automatically installed. Using this method, HP Easy Printer Care also discovers any HP printers that have been installed on the computer over the network by selecting Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My HP Printers screen. When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection that does not use a DOT4 port (for instance, by using the Add Printer Wizard), HP Easy Printer Care does not automatically discover the printer. For USB or parallel connections, the print driver must be installed by using the printing-system software CD in order for the requires DOT4 port to be installed. When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) network connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is an option for a Custom Installation. It is not an option for a Basic Installation or a Full Installation over a network. HP Easy Printer Care is not supported over Novell Netware (IPX/SPX) network connections. Access To gain access to the HP Easy Printer Care, follow these steps: ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select All Programs. 3. Select Hewlett-Packard. HP Easy Printer Care 43 4. Select HP Easy Printer Care. 5. Click Start HP Easy Printer Care. The Easy Printer Care screen appears. Figure 2-2 My HP Printers screen If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected directly through a USB or parallel DOT4 port, an icon for the product appears in the main pane of the Easy Printer Care screen (see Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer). If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected over a network, click Find Other Printers. Find Other Printers Click Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My HP Printers screen to open the Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen. 44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-3 Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen If you know the TCP/IP address of the printer, type the address in the Search for field and then click Next. To conduct a search for printers over a network, select the General search (searches for all HP printers on your network) option. Click Advanced Search Properties to open a screen that you can use to select the number of “hops” that the system makes. The Advanced Search Settings screen appears. Click Cancel on this and on any other screen where it appears to return to the main HP Easy Printer Care screen. Figure 2-4 Advanced Search Settings screen When you click Next on the Find Other Printers screen, the Searching for printers, please wait.. screen appears. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 45 Figure 2-5 Searching for printers, please wait.. screen When a printer has been found, one of two screens appears: the Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen or the Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen. The screens are shown in the following figures. Figure 2-6 Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen If the results do not list the printer, click Previous to search again. If the printer that you want is listed, click Next. See Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen. 46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Select the printer in the Available Printers: pane and click the green double-arrows button. The model name moves to the Printers to Add: pane. Click Next to add the printer. The Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen appears. Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings screen. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 47 Software description Figure 2-7 Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen Figure 2-9 Alert Settings screen Turn alert notification on and off by selecting an option in the Settings for: field. Under Printer Alerts, select the kind of alert notifications that you want to receive: ● Printer cannot print ● Printer has a problem, but can continue If you want to be notified of problems only when printing to the product, select Only if I am printing to this printer (user mode). If you are an administrator or are responsible for ordering printer supplies, select Anytime problems occur (maintainer mode). Under Notification Method, select one of the following options: ● Popup dialog ● Desktop alert Click Save to save your alert-notification settings. The My HP Printers screen appears. 48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer My HP Printers screen – Overview tab Click the printer icon to open the Overview tab. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 49 Figure 2-11 Overview tab The Overview tab shows the following information under Device Status: ● Printer name ● Printer TCP/IP address ● A graph showing usage for each color print cartridge ● A list of any problems that require attention Click 50 Chapter 2 (the help button) to open the HP Easy Printer Care Help screen. Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-12 HP Easy Printer Care Help screen The Overview Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status and Cartridges sections of the Overview tab. Under Supplies Status on the Overview tab, the following information is provided about print media: ● Location (by tray) ● Type (media type) ● Size (media size) ● Status (OK, Out) Under Cartridges, the following information is provided for each color cartridge: ● Print Cartridge (color) ● Estimated Status (percentage) ● Pages Remaining ● HP Part Number Click Supplies Ordering… to open the Supplies Ordering screen. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 51 Figure 2-13 Supplies Ordering screen Select the appropriate check boxes under Order for each supply that you want. In the Quantity field, type the quantity that you want to order. Click Print Shopping List for a hard-copy list of the supplies that you are ordering. Click Shop Online for Supplies if you have access to the Web and would like to place an online order. The Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears. Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen 52 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description If you click Yes, please send my printer information, only information and status about your printer will be sent; no personal information will be shared. If you click No, let me provide my printer information, no information is sent. The Welcome to HP SureSupply screen opens. Figure 2-15 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen On the Supplies Ordering page, click Cancel to return to the My HP Printers screen. If the status of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer changes after you open the HP Easy Printer Care screen (for instance, if you have sent a print job to the product), click upper-right corner of any screen where it appears. (the refresh button) in the HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab On the My HP Printers screen, click the Support tab to open the Support screen. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 53 Figure 2-16 Support tab Click 54 Chapter 2 (the help button) to open the Support Help screen. Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-17 Support Help screen The Support Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status, Maintenance Tools, and Troubleshooting Tools sections of the Support tab. On the Support tab, click Supplies Ordering to open the Supplies Ordering screen. The Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen opens. See Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen and the following instructions to proceed with your order. Maintenance Tools The following tools are available in the Maintenance Tools pane: ENWW ● Printer Usage Report ● Advanced Tools & Settings ● Software Update HP Easy Printer Care 55 Click Printer Usage Report to open a screen that provides information about print jobs that have been sent to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The Printer Usage Report screen has three tabs: ● By Date/Time ● By User ● By Application The following table shows the information that is available on each of the printer-usage report tabs. Table 2-7 Printer Usage Report Printer Usage Report tab Print-job information By Date/Time Date/Time Host User Job Name Application Color Sides Mono Sides Sheets Used By User User Total Jobs Color Sides Mono Sides Sheets Used By Application Application Total Jobs Color Sides Mono Sides Sheets Used To export the printer-usage report into a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel or other database software program, follow these steps: 1. Click File. 2. Click Export. 3. Select the file format that you want to export the printer-usage report in, and then click OK. Click the Advanced Tools & Settings option to open the HP Embedded Web Server. For more information, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. 56 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW NOTE HP Easy Printer Care software is a Windows application and does in itself not require any browser support. The link to the HP Embedded Web Server, however uses a Web browser. Software description If you have access to the Internet, click Software Update to open the Web browser and find information about the latest software for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The Welcome to HP Software Update screen appears. Figure 2-18 Welcome to HP Software Update screen Click Next to check for software updates. The Checking for updates… screen appears. Figure 2-19 Checking for updates… screen ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 57 If software updates are available, a Web page opens with information about the updates. HP Software Update finds updates for both print-drivers and HP Easy Printer Care. You can also go directly to the following URL for software updates: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Browse online information to find additional information about the product on the HP Web site. In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Contact a support specialist to open a Web page where you can supply information about the product and receive customized support. You can send an instant message, an e-mail, or submit a problem and view the case status online. The page also provides telephone numbers for HP customer care centers. Troubleshooting Tools The following tools are available in the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab: ● Run online diagnostics ● Browse online information ● Contact a support specialist You can use the Run online diagnostics tool to communicate with an HP Web site that analyzes the product and looks for problems. When you click the Run online diagnostics option, the Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears. For more information, see Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen. 58 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Embedded Web Server ● HP Color LaserJet 3800n ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dn ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn The base model, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is installed. The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. Instead of installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in offices that have a limited number of products. The only requirement is that the management console must have a supported Web browser. In environments that have a larger number of products, in which one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product management. Use HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks when you want to perform operations on a selected set of products. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on multiple products in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of products. For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/ support/clj3800. Access to the HP EWS To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, open a supported Web browser and type the product transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name in the address field. To find the product TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/ IP section. To find the host name of the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section. You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP EWS window. The TCP/IP address also appears on the product configuration page (the Embedded Jetdirect page), which you can print from the product control-panel display. Follow these steps to print an Embedded Jetdirect page: ENWW (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press . (the up button) and 3. Press and 4. Press (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. to print the configuration page. HP Embedded Web Server 59 Software description The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models when they are connected through a network: The HP EWS frame Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation-tab selections and menu-bar selections. See the following sections for more information about each tab or area: ● Information tab ● Settings tab ● Networking tab Information tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab. NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until the user logs in. See Security for more information. Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. 60 ● Device Status. This screen provides current status information about the product. ● Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the product configuration. ● Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed, and the serial number of the product. ● Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors. ● Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed. ● Diagnostics Page. The Diagnostics Page screen provides information about calibration, color density, and parameters. ● Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address and serial number. ● Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel. ● Color Usage Job Log. The Color Usage Job Log screen provides information about users, print jobs, and software programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. ● Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Links to off-product solutions ● hp instant support. This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the product. Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the "Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible. ● Order Supplies. This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for the product. ● Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for the product. Device Status screen Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through a Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information without going to the product to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the product Web page. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 61 Software description Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks. Figure 2-20 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen Configuration Page You can gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS. The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The following figures show an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS. 62 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-21 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 63 Figure 2-22 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. Figure 2-23 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. Settings tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure device section. 64 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW ● Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and configure the product remotely. ● E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail. ● Alerts. IT administrators can configure the product to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone. ● AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to your service provider. ● Security. Use the Security screen to manage security for the product. ● Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice. ● Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the product, and the physical location of the product. ● Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear. ● Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the product. ● Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the product at a certain time on a daily basis. Only one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page. ● Restrict Color. Use the Restrict Color screen to restrict color printing for all users and software programs or for specified users and software programs. Configure device You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give management information systems (MIS) managers the level of control that they require within their network environments. The following figure shows an example of product options that can be configured remotely. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 65 Software description Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. Figure 2-24 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen Alerts The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e-mail addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the print cartridge. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification. 66 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-25 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 67 Figure 2-26 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. Security The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access to the HP EWS: as a general user, an IT administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page. 68 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-27 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible. If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking). Restrict Color The Restrict Color screen is shown in the following figure. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 69 Use the Restrict Color screen to set color-printing access for the printer and to configure permissions by user and software program. For more information about using this screen, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. Control over color printing with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is possible in a variety of ways. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/coloraccess Networking tab The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure. 70 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. Figure 2-28 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories: ● Configuration ● Security ● Diagnostics For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 71 Configuration section ● Network Settings ● Other Settings ● Privacy Settings ● Select Language Security section ● Settings ● Authorization ● Mgmt. Protocols Diagnostics section ● Network Statistics ● Protocol Info ● Configuration Page Network settings From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols: 72 ● TCP/IP ● Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX) ● AppleTalk ● Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC) ● Simple network management protocol (SNMP) Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the product in Mac OS X. The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol. Use IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the HP Printer Utility. ● Access to the HP Printer Utility ● Supplies Status ● Device Information ● HP Support ● Upload Fonts ● File Upload ● Update Firmware ● Duplex mode ● Color Usage ● Trays Configuration ● Lock Resources ● Stored Jobs ● E-mail Alerts ● Network Settings ● Rendezvous Setting ● Supplies Management ● Restrict Color ● Additional Settings Software description The following topics are discussed in this section: Access to the HP Printer Utility In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility: 1. Open the Finder. 2. Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears. In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility: ENWW 1. Click Go. 2. Click Utilities. 3. Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears. HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 73 Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected If the product does not appear, click More Printers…. The Connection Type screen appears. Figure 2-30 Connection Type screen Select the connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The product name appears under Device Name. 74 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing printer information. Software description To open the HP Printer Utility directly, select the printer and click Launch Utility. Figure 2-31 Select Printer screen – printer selected On the Select Printer screen, click Settings… to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS. For more information about the HP EWS, see HP Embedded Web Server in this guide. To open the HP Printer Utility, select the product and click Launch Utility. If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen appears. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 75 Figure 2-32 Printer Status screen Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens. The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility. Supplies Status The HP Printer Utility opens to the Supplies Status screen. Figure 2-33 Supplies Status screen Click Detailed Supplies Information… to open the Supplies Information screen. 76 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-34 Supplies Information screen Use the scroll button to see information about the color print cartridges. If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies, a screen appears that explains the ordering process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your product to facilitate the ordering of supplies. Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 77 Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement. You can continue ordering supplies without sending product information by clicking the continue without sending this information link. To send a message to HP, click the contact HP link. On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the status of the trays. Figure 2-36 Paper Status screen You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies. Device Information Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the product service ID (if assigned), the firmware version, and the serial number. 78 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-37 Device Information screen The product configuration page shows other settings; click Print Configuration Page to print it. Click the printer icon in the lower-left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer (see Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected). HP Support Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen. Figure 2-38 HP Online Support screen ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 79 If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen. Click the Instant Support screen to open the HP Instant Support Web page. Figure 2-39 HP Instant Support link Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement. Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive generic product support. Click Continue to open a page where you can select the product and find further information about product support. Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility. On the HP Online Support screen, click Order Supplies Online to open the Order Supplies Web page (see Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link). The Online Registration link is not available at this time. Upload Fonts In the Configuration Settings menu, click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. 80 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-40 Upload Fonts screen The drop-down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following options: ● Memory. Fonts that are available in the printer memory are listed. ● Disk. Select this option to shows any fonts that are installed on the product hard disk or flash disk. By default, no fonts are stored on either of these disks. To upload fonts, select the font name and click Add File Upload On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 81 Figure 2-41 File Upload screen The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first being opened through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the product, but some cannot. Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product by using the File Upload command. ● HP LaserJet printer command language (.PCL) ● Portable document format (.PDF) ● Postscript (.PS) ● Text (.TXT) On the File Upload screen, click Choose… to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to upload and click Open. On the File Upload screen, click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was successful. If the file loads successfully, no message appears. On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload. Update Firmware Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the product. Browse to the firmware file on the screen that appears and click Open. The Update Firmware screen shows the file name. Click Update. For more information about performing remote firmware upgrades, see Remote firmware update in this STR. For information about firmware updates in Mac OS 9 operating systems, see Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only). 82 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Duplex mode For the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models, the Configuration Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting. Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen. 1. Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen. 2. Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default. 3. Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page. Software description Use the Enable Duplex Mode command to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the page. Color Usage Click Color Usage in the Configuration Settings menu to open a screen and print a color-usage job log. Figure 2-42 Print Color Usage Job Log screen Click Print Color Usage Log to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and software programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. In additions, the color-usage log lists the following details about print jobs: ENWW ● Date and time ● Total number of jobs ● Mono (monochrome, or black-and-white) sides ● Color sides ● Media sheets HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 83 Trays Configuration The Trays Configuration screen is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-43 Trays Configuration screen 1. Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your product. 2. To change the media size, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default Media Size drop-down menu. 3. To change the media type, select a tray and then select a different media type in the Default Media Type drop-down menu. 4. Click Apply Now to save the settings. Lock Resources Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 84 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-44 Lock Resources screen In Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings: ● No Locking provides full control of the product. ● Minimal Locking provides control over paper-handling features. ● Moderate Locking blocks changes in the product configuration. ● Maximal Locking prevents users from changing product control-panel settings. In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit that you want to lock. WARNING! Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that is currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action. Stored Jobs Select Stored Job to change the Enable Job Storing setting. This setting is selected by default. Click to clear the check box to disable the job-storing feature. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 85 Figure 2-45 Enable Job Storing screen You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field. Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field. Select a stored job and click Print to print the job. Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job. For information about releasing and deleting stored jobs at the product control panel, see Releasing a job-storage print job. E-mail Alerts Select E-mail Alerts to configure the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to send e-mail notifications to users. If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. 86 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-46 E-mail Alerts screen Click Open E-mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS. The HP EWS opens to the Setup screen on the Alerts tab, where you can set notifications. For information about configuring notifications, see Alerts. Network Settings Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen. Figure 2-47 IP Settings screen ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 87 Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu: ● DHCP ● BootP ● Manual You can also use this screen to modify the following settings: ● Host Name ● IP Address ● Subnet Mask ● Default Gateway To save new settings, click Apply Now. To view and change other network settings, click Additional Network Settings. If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see Networking tab in this STR. Rendezvous Setting Select Rendezvous Setting to open the Rendezvous Setting screen. Rendezvous is enabled by default. To disable Rendezvous, click to clear the Enable Rendezvous check box and then click Apply Now. Figure 2-48 Rendezvous screen 88 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW ● Port 9100 (default) ● IPP ● LPD-RAW ● LPD-TEXT ● LPD-AUTO ● LPD-BINPS ● LPD-Queue5 ● LPD-Queue6 ● LPD-Queue7 ● LPD-Queue8 ● LPD-Queue9 ● LPD-Queue10 Software description The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu: After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it. Supplies Management Click Supplies Management in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Replace Supplies screen. Figure 2-49 Replace Supplies screen The settings on this screen prompt the printer to stop printing at a certain threshold (a specific number of pages in the tray). By default, the Stop At Supply Out setting is selected. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 89 To prompt the printer to stop printing at a different threshold, select Stop at Supply Low and type a value in the Low Threshold (0-100) field. When the number of sheets in the tray reaches this value, the printer stops printing. You can also specify the printer behavior when the color print cartridges run out. By default, the Continue Printing in Black-Only Mode is selected. To prompt the printer to stop instead of continuing to print using the black cartridge, select Stop. Click Apply Now to save the new settings. Restrict Color Click Restrict Color in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Restrict Color Use screen. Figure 2-50 Restrict Color Use screen On the Restrict Color Use tab, select one of the following options: ● Enable Color. Select this option to print all print jobs in color. ● Color If Allowed (selected by default). Select this option to allow the user and the software program control over whether print jobs are printed in color. ● Disable Color. Select this option to print only in black. Click Apply Now to save new settings. To restrict color by user, click the User tab. 90 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-51 Restrict Color Use – User tab To set user permissions, select a user and then, in the Default User Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Black Only ● Color Click Apply Now to save new settings. To add a new user, click Add. Figure 2-52 Restrict Color – new user Type the new user name in the User Name field. On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Black Only ● Color Click Add to add the new user. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new user. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 91 To restrict color usage by software program, click the Application tab on the Restrict Color Usage screen. Figure 2-53 Restrict Color Use – Application tab To set software-program permissions, select a program and then, on the Default User Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Black Only ● Color Click Apply Now to save new settings. To add a new software program, click Add. Figure 2-54 Restrict Color – new user Type the new software-program name in the Application Name field. On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Black Only ● Color Click Add to add the new software program. 92 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new software program. Additional Settings Software description Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS. Figure 2-55 Additional Settings screen To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server. For information about HP EWS settings, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 93 HP Web Jetadmin Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected products within an intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network-administration server. To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin 94 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Introduction This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 in Windows 98 and Windows Me. NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems. ● the product control panel ● the software program print dialog box ● the driver user interface Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel settings. When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by performing a Custom Installation. NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet 4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print-driver interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me. This chapter also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. The chapter contains the following sections: ENWW Introduction 95 HP traditional print drivers for Windows You can control print jobs from several places: 96 ● Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me ● Help system ● Finishing tab features ● Effects tab features ● Paper tab features ● Job Storage tab features ● Basics tab features ● Color tab features ● Configure tab features ● HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways. To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps: 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open. Properties driver tabs 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me: ENWW ● General tab ● Details tab ● Color Management tab ● Sharing tab ● Finishing tab ● Effects tab ● Paper tab ● Job Storage tab ● Basics tab ● Color tab ● Configure tab Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 97 HP traditional print drivers for Windows In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps: Only product-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following tabs are described: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage ● Configure ● Basics ● Color ● Configure The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Configure tab. 98 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Help system The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. What's this? Help Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help Incompatible Options messages Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict. NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.` Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the buttons is as follows: ENWW ● Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. ● Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value. Help system 99 HP traditional print drivers for Windows When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Bubble Help Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab. Figure 3-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature. 100 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Finishing tab. HP traditional print drivers for Windows Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab. Figure 3-3 The default Finishing tab The Finishing tab contains the following controls: ENWW ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Document Options ● Document preview image ● Print Quality Finishing tab features 101 Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets settings: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage ● Basics ● Color Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click Delete. NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones. The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu: ● Default Print Settings ● User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored. The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings. 102 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ENWW Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not selected Yes Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not selected Yes Booklet Printing Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1 Yes Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Print Quality Finishing tab, Print Quality group box Default Yes Current Setting Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) This is the “Default” setting Raster Compression (HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver only) Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Automatic Rendering Mode (HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver only) Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Automatic Send Truetype as Bitmaps Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Available, not selected Output Settings Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Scale Patterns (WYSIWIG) selected Print Document On Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Off; print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab Yes Size to print on Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Actual size specified on the Paper tab Yes2 Scale to Fit Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Unavailable, selected Yes Watermarks Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box (none) Yes First Page Only (watermark) Effects tab, Watermark dialog box Unavailable Yes Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Message Angle (watermark) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Diagonal Yes2 Watermark message angle (angle) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Unavailable unless Angle option is selected, 52 degrees Yes HP traditional print drivers for Windows Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Yes Finishing tab features 103 Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued) 104 Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Name (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Arial Yes2 Color (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Gray Yes Shading (watermark font ) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Very Light Yes2 Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box 80 No Style (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Regular Yes Use Different Paper/ Covers Paper tab, Paper Options group box Off (All of the pages use the same media.) No Size is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes Source is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes Type is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message about the destination of the job No Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off No Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Require PIN to print option Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected No PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank Windows User Name Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected No Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable, Automatic selected No Display Job ID when printing Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box Unavailable No Copy Basics tab, Copies group box 1 Yes Orientation Basics tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes Landscape Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes Rotate by 180 degrees Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Automatic (color options) Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes Manual (color options) Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes Current Setting (color) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) This is the “Automatic” Setting Yes Edge Control Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Normal Yes Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.), General group box Black Only Yes Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) Detail Yes Neutral Grays (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) Black Only Yes Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) Detail Yes Neutral Grays (photographs) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) 4-Color Yes Halftone (photographs) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) Detail Yes 1 2 Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw. Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide. When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings: ● Print on Both Sides is set to ON ● Flip Pages Up is set to ON ● Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable ● Pages per Sheet is set to 2 ● Page Order is set to Right then Down Document Options The Document Options group box contains the following controls: ENWW ● Print on Both Sides ● Flip Pages Up Finishing tab features 105 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued) ● Booklet Printing ● Pages per Sheet ● Print Page Borders ● Page Order Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist: ● ● Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types: ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Extra Heavy ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes: ● Statement ● Envelope #10 ● Envelope DL ● Envelope C5 ● Envelope B5 ● Envelope Monarch ● Double Japan Postscard Rotated Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when Paper Size is set to the following media sizes: ● Letter ● Legal ● A4 Automatically printing on both sides The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models: 106 ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dn ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver. All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types: ● Prepunched ● Preprinted ● Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled. To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used. Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media. Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature.) If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported. To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See Paper Handling Options in the Configure tab features section of this chapter. If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab. Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side: ENWW ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Prepunched ● Bond ● Recycled Finishing tab features 107 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Manually printing on both sides ● Colored ● Rough Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side. To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps: 1. Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box. 2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print. 3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure. Figure 3-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function. Flip Pages Up Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab. 108 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Table 3-2 Page orientation Orientation (Basics tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together. Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar. Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book. Booklet Printing ● [paper size] (Left Binding) ● [paper size] (Right Binding) When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. For more information, see Pages per Sheet. Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver. The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist: ● Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected. ● % of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1. ● Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4. If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing to tell you why it is disabled. Book and Booklet Printing The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports both book and booklet printing. A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages, Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different ENWW Finishing tab features 109 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing dropdown menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper tab: Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see Paper tab features in this chapter. A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings. To print a booklet Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs. 1. In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Finishing tab. 3. Select the Print on Both Sides check box. 4. In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter [Left binding]). 5. Click OK in the print driver. 6. Click OK in the print dialog box to print. Figure 3-5 Printing a booklet Pages per Sheet Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are 110 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings: ● 1 page per sheet (default) ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable. Print Page Borders Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1. Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page. HP traditional print drivers for Windows Page Order The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections: ● Right, then Down ● Down, then Right ● Left, then Down ● Down, then Left The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure. Figure 3-6 Page-order preview images ENWW ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet Finishing tab features 111 Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics ● Color Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. Print Quality The HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings. The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click Details…. The Print Quality Details dialog box opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using. Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The following options are available: ● 112 Current Setting Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● Graphic Settings ● Font Settings ● Output Settings Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default" setting to This is a "Custom" setting. Graphic Settings The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression drop-down menu. ● Automatic. The print driver determines the best compression method to use. This is the default setting. ● Best Quality. This setting forces the print driver to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.) ● Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the print driver to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost). Font Settings In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts. Output Settings The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings: ● Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default. ● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure. ENWW Finishing tab features 113 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method. The Raster Compression drop-down menu provides the following settings: Figure 3-8 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The following options are available: ● Current Setting ● Graphic Settings ● Font Settings ● Output Settings Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default" setting to This is a "Custom" setting. Graphic Settings The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available: ● Automatic. This is the default setting. ● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output. ● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases. ● Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect. Font Settings In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) 114 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts. Output Settings The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black. The following are default values for the Output Settings: Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default. ● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. HP traditional print drivers for Windows ● ENWW Finishing tab features 115 Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Effects tab. Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab. Figure 3-9 Effects tab The Effects tab contains the following controls: 116 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Fit To Page ● Document preview image ● Watermarks Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features. Fit To Page The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls: ● Print Document On ● Scale to Fit ● % of Normal Size Print Document On Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size. ● % of Normal Size is not 100. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size. Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter. Figure 3-10 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ENWW Effects tab features 117 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions: When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size. % of Normal Size The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer. The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected). Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview. The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%. You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box. The following settings disable % of Normal Size: ● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics ● Color For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features. Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The Watermarks group box contains the following controls: ● 118 Current Watermarks Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● First Page Only ● Edit… Current Watermarks The following watermarks are preset in the driver: ● (none) ● Confidential ● Draft ● SAMPLE The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image. First Page Only Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page). Edit… Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the Watermark Details dialog box. ENWW Effects tab features 119 HP traditional print drivers for Windows When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)". Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes. The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls: NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings. ● Current Watermarks ● Watermark Message ● Message Angle ● Document preview image ● Font Attributes ● Default watermark settings Current Watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 120 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available. To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark. Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on). Message Angle ● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. ● Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-;eft and mid-right edges of the page. ● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark Details dialog box. Font Attributes Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font. The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls: ● Name The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent. ● Color The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections: ENWW ● Gray ● Red Effects tab features 121 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available: ● ● Yellow ● Green ● Cyan ● Blue ● Magenta Shading The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu: ● Lightest ● Very Light (default) ● Light ● Medium Light ● Medium ● Medium Dark ● Dark ● Very Dark ● Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select Darkest to produce a black watermark. ● Size Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent. ● Style The following settings are available: ● Regular ● Bold ● Italic ● Bold Italic The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular. Default watermark settings The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks. 122 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Table 3-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular HP traditional print drivers for Windows Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. ENWW Effects tab features 123 Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Paper tab. Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper tab. Figure 3-12 Paper tab The Paper tab contains the following controls: 124 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Paper Options ● Document preview image Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● Product image Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features. Paper Options HP traditional print drivers for Windows The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default. Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default) The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order: ● Size is ● Source is ● Type is ● Use Different Paper/Covers ● Custom Size is The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes. NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size ENWW Paper tab features 125 media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media. Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the print driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes. NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document. When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray. For information about media sizes, see Media attributes. When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see Use Different Paper/Covers. Custom The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box. NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected and any setting other than First Page is also selected. Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab: 126 ● If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size. ● If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size. Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches x 11 inches). The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names. The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section. Name The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently. Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size. ● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size. ● If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled." ● If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu. If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size. ENWW Paper tab features 127 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions: Save, Delete, or Rename The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels: Save, Delete, and Rename. ● Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button. ● Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save. ● Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu. The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another. Table 3-4 Name drop-down menu text strings State Drop-down menu contents Button label Action Next state 1 Untitled Save Click Save. 3 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2 Change the width or height values. 1 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Click Save. 3 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2 Change the width or height values. 2 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Click Delete. 1 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4 Change the width or height values. 1 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Click Rename (when the name is unique). 3 Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate). 4 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4 2 3 4 128 Chapter 3 Save Delete Rename HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Table 3-4 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued) State Drop-down menu contents Button label Action Next state Change the width or height values. 2 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Custom size (width and height controls) The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height. Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits. The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change. Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric). Custom width and height control limits The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device. Table 3-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches) Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Tray 3 (500-sheet) Duplexing unit ENWW Paper tab features 129 HP traditional print drivers for Windows If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed. Dynamic measurement units Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard (inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types. Close When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button. Table 3-6 Close dialog-box text strings If the drop-down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when you click the Close button Untitled Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. Delete The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that last appeared in the drop-down menu. Rename The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. Source is The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product: 130 ● Automatically select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 ● Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray) Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● Tray 2 (250-sheet tray) ● Tray 3 (500-sheet tray) The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For more information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR. Type is The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually Plain. ● Unspecified ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Transparency ● Prepunched ● Labels ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb) ● Rough ● Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb) ● Envelope ● Light 60-75 g/m2 (16.4–20.5 lb) ● Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb) ● Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb) ● Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb) ● Tough Paper (Glossy Film) HP traditional print drivers for Windows The following standard types appear in the list: The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting. When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray. ENWW Paper tab features 131 For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR. Use Different Paper/Covers You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options: ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages ● Last Page ● Back Cover NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program. Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections. Front Cover Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document. The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-15 Front Cover options 132 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW The following are the Front Cover options: ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter. Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default. Figure 3-16 First Page options The following are the First Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the ENWW Paper tab features 133 HP traditional print drivers for Windows First Page Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter. Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First Page) for the other pages of the document. The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-17 Other Pages options The following are the Other Pages options: ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter. Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document. The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure. 134 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Figure 3-18 Last Page options ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter. Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document. The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure. Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting ENWW Paper tab features 135 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The following are the Last Page options: The following are the Back Cover options: ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option. NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics ● Color For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features. Product image The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties. On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current 136 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product-image hot spot, is highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting: The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image. ● Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image. ● On the Paper tab, only source trays have product-image hot spots and can be highlighted. HP traditional print drivers for Windows ● ENWW Paper tab features 137 Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Job Storage tab. NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured. Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections. The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features. After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Configure tab features section in this chapter. To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. 7. Under Other Options, click More…. 8. If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu. If you select at least 128 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box. 9. If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box. 10. Click OK to make the hard-disk and job-storage features available. 138 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. 7. Click More…. 8. Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box. NOTE When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not visible. ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed: ● Quick Copy ● Stored Job The following figure shows the Job Storage tab. ENWW Job Storage tab features 139 HP traditional print drivers for Windows If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab The Job Storage tab contains the following controls: NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing. ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Status dialog box ● Job Storage Mode ● PIN ● Job Notification Options ● User Name ● Job Name ● Using job-storage features when printing Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features. 140 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Status dialog box The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab. Job Storage Mode Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options: ● Off ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job ● Quick Copy ● Stored Job Off When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product. Proof and Hold To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB. When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel. After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Private Job To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB. ENWW Job Storage tab features 141 HP traditional print drivers for Windows These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job. Quick Copy To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel. NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. Stored Job To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled. Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel. The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or is overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents. A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private. 142 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. PIN The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if you select either of the following options: ● Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the product control panel in order to print the job. For more information, see Private Job. ● Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see Stored Job. Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed. The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location. User Name Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings: ● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job. The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options. ● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters. Job Name Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings: ENWW ● This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. ● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display. Job Storage tab features 143 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Job Notification Options The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with . The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display. If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name. Using job-storage features when printing To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Job Storage tab. 4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. Releasing a job-storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel. 144 (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press 6. Press . 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows . . . ENWW If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8. 8. Press 9. Press and to select the number of copies to print. to print the job. Deleting a job-storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press . 4. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 5. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press 6. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press 7. Press . 8. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. . . If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 9. Press to delete the job. The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state. ENWW Job Storage tab features 145 HP traditional print drivers for Windows . Basics tab features To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Basics tab. The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver. Figure 3-21 Basics tab The Basics tab contains the following controls: 146 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Copies ● Orientation ● Document preview image Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● About… Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features. Copies Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print. Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible. Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait. NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation. The Orientation group box contains three options: ● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media. ● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media. ● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media. You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image. ENWW Basics tab features 147 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics ● Color For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features. About… When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions: ● Click OK. ● Press Esc. ● Press Alt + F4. ● Press Enter. The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies according to driver, date, and version. Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box 148 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information: ● Printer name ● Driver name ● Print driver version number ● Copyright information ● Driver Extensions (if any) ● Configuration Status The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box. The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any. HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined. ENWW Basics tab features 149 Color tab features To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Color tab. Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure. Figure 3-23 Color tab The Color tab contains the following controls: 150 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Color Options ● Color Themes Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● Document preview image Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Finishing tab features. Color Options Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls: ● Automatic option (default) ● Manual option ● Settings button (Click this to open the Color Settings dialog box.) ● Print in Grayscale check box Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color-printing needs. Manual To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color Settings dialog box appears. To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Automatic" settings. ENWW Color tab features 151 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Automatic Figure 3-24 Color Settings dialog box The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls for each of the following components: ● General ● ● ● ● Edge Control Text ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone Graphics ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone Photographs ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone General Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing. 152 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components: ● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness ● Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects ● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges The Edge Control option offers four settings: ● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On. ● Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On. ● Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On. ● Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off. The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs. The following options are available: ● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. ● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs. Halftone The Halftone setting controls the selection of a printer-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone settings are available: ● Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail. ● Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills. Print in Grayscale Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hard-copy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed. ENWW Color tab features 153 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Neutral Grays Color Themes This group box contains controls for color settings: ● RGB Color ● CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only) RGB Color The RGB Color drop-down menu contains the following settings: ● Default (sRGB) ● Image Optimization (sRGB) ● Adobe RGB (1998) ● None ● Custom Profile Default (sRGB) Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics. Image Optimization (sRGB) Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement. Adobe RGB (1998) Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the product software to manage the color space. None Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system. NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system. 154 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Custom Profile Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output. The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one. You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only) The CMYK Color drop-down menu contains the following settings: Default CMYK+ Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints. SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of America and other countries/regions. Euroscale Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions. DIC DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions. Custom Profile Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output. The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one. You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware ENWW Color tab features 155 HP traditional print drivers for Windows SWOP Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics ● Color For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features. 156 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Configure tab features To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure. Figure 3-25 Configure tab The Configure tab contains the following controls: ENWW Configure tab features 157 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab. ● Printer Model ● Paper Handling Options ● Other Options ● Automatic configuration ● Printer image Printer Model In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab. The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab. The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are as follows: ● 3800: HP Color LaserJet 3800 ● 3800n: HP Color LaserJet 3800n ● 3800dn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dn ● 3800dtn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn Table 3-7 Printer-model configuration settings Driver location Setting 3800 3800n 3800dn 3800dtn Configuration tab Duplexing Unit Available, not selected Available, not selected Selected Selected Allow Manual Duplexing Selected Selected Selected Selected Mopier Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Selected Selected Optional Paper Sources (None) (None) (None) 1 x HP 500Sheet Input Tray Printer Hard Disk Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Job Storage Enabled Unavailable Available, not selected Selected Selected Font Card(s) Selected Selected Selected Selected Allow Scaling from Large Available, not Paper selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Alternative Letterhead Mode Unavailable Unavailable Available, not selected Available, not selected Ignore Application Collation Unavailable Selected Selected Selected Total Memory 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 256 MB More Configuration Options dialog box 158 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Table 3-7 Printer-model configuration settings (continued) Driver location Setting 3800 3800n 3800dn 3800dtn Driver work space (DWS) 6.0 MB 38.0 MB 102.0 MB 102.0 MB Include Types in Applications Source List Selected Selected Selected Selected If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to Autoconfigured. Paper Handling Options ● Duplexing unit ● Allow Manual Duplexing ● Mopier Enabled ● Optional Paper Sources HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls: Duplexing unit The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types: ● Transparency ● Labels ● Extra Heavy ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper ● Envelope NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page. Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment. ENWW Configure tab features 159 Mopier Enabled The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then temporarily storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is on. Mopier mode and collation Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature. Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation. To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected. The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear. Table 3-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings Mopier Enabled Application collation Ignore Application Collation Expected result Not selected Not selected Not available 3 copies uncollated Not selected Selected Not available 3 copies collated Selected Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Selected Not selected 3 copies collated by printer Selected Selected Selected 3 copies collated by printer Optional Paper Sources The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab. 160 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu: ● (None). This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. ● HP 500-Sheet Input Tray Other Options HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the More Configuration Options dialog box. Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls: ● Storage ● Fonts ● Allow Scaling from Large Paper ● Alternative Letterhead Mode ● Ignore Application Collation ● Printer Memory ● Include Types in Application Source List Storage The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If the product is equipped with a hard-disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all job-storage options are available. If your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk drive but has a minimum of 128 MB of memory, limited job-storage options are available. When the job- ENWW Configure tab features 161 storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product control panel. Fonts The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button. Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box. Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks: ● Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button. ● Specify a unique font-card name. ● Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards. ● Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s). ● Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s). Complete the following steps to configure a font card: 162 1. Make sure that the font card is installed correctly. 2. Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears. 3. Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears. 4. Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card. 5. Click OK. Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW 6. Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary. 7. Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list. 8. Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system. NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card. Allow Scaling from Large Paper Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger-than-supported paper sizes to appear in the Paper tab Size Is: drop-down list. By default, the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is not selected. Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or facedown, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown. When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting: ● Letterhead ● Preprinted Ignore Application Collation This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using. Printer Memory The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer. The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab. The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance. The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS) values in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To ENWW Configure tab features 163 HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Allow Scaling from Large Paper selection can be helpful, for example, when printing a document with a large media size of 11 x 17 or A3. You can use the Print Document On: setting on the Effects tab to print the document on a media size that product supports. manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box. Include Types in Application Source List When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties. Automatic configuration If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer since installation, click Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the print driver automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration for Windows section of this STR. If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the Configure tab. If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your product model. Printer image The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab. NOTE The product image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed. 164 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet 4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the PS Emulation Driver. This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me. Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me: ● General ● Details ● Color Management ● Sharing ● Paper ● Graphics ● Fonts ● Device Options ● PostScript PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 165 HP traditional print drivers for Windows In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps: emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from Adobe. Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe Web site at the following Web site: www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html See the Font support section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts. Help system The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation Driver. What's this Help Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Paper tab. The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Paper tab. 166 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW HP traditional print drivers for Windows Figure 3-28 Paper tab The Paper tab contains the following controls: ● Paper size ● Layout ● Orientation ● Paper source ● Copies ● Unprintable Area… ● More Options… ● About … ● Restore Defaults Paper size The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click the icon to specify the media that you want. A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab, such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the product control panel. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 167 Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size. The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box. Figure 3-29 Custom-designed size dialog box The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box: ● Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define up to three custom sizes at one time. ● Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size. ● Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size. ● Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom media size. ● Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when printing on a rollfed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the page when printing. ● Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog box to their original values. Layout Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet. For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file. The following options are available in the Layout group box: 168 ● 1 up ● 2 up ● 4 up Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Orientation The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options are available: ● Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation. ● Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation. ● Rotate check box. The Rotate check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option. Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page. To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box. Paper source This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have chosen. The following options are available: ● Auto Select Tray ● Printer Auto Select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 ● Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the product. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name. ● Each of the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports, such as Plain, Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see Driver-supported media types. Copies Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting. Unprintable Area… Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Figure 3-30 Page dimensions in inches Figure 3-31 Unprintable Area dialog box The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed. More Options… Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure. Figure 3-32 More Paper Options dialog box The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box. Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides. When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar. When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how the printed document will look. About … Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver. The following figure shows the About dialog box. 170 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Figure 3-33 About dialog box Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values. Graphics tab features 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Graphics tab. The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, color controls, and halftoning settings for the product. The following figure shows the Graphics tab. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171 HP traditional print drivers for Windows To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps: Figure 3-34 Graphics tab The Graphics tab contains the following controls: ● Resolution ● Color Control ● Halftoning ● Special ● Scaling ● Restore Defaults Resolution Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 600 dpi. Color Control The Color Control option specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors that you see on your screen. No Image Color Management (faster) is selected by default, and results in a faster print job. If you click Use Image Color Management on the host (slower), the Choose Rendering Intent button becomes available. Click this button to open the Image Color Management dialog box to specify exactly how you want the colors adjusted. The following figure shows the Image Color Management dialog box. 172 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Figure 3-35 Image Color Management dialog box Use the Image Color Management dialog box to specify how color images are created to produce the best-looking image on the printed page. The following controls are available: ● Saturation. Use this option when printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors. ● Contrast. Use this option for photographs or pictures in which the colors blend together. ● Colorimetric. Use this option for documents that contain a color for which you need an exact match, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink. The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to use for halftone screens. If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings. Special The Special group box contains the following options: ● Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting. ● Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting. Scaling Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original. When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default setting is 100%. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 173 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Halftoning Fonts tab features The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Fonts tab. Figure 3-36 Fonts tab The following options are available: ● Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table ● Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts ● Always use TrueType fonts Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the product. If you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen. Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts. Font Substitution Table Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options for changing the TrueType-to-postscript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution Table dialog box. 174 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Figure 3-37 Font Substitution Table Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen. Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the product when your document is printed. This ensures that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer. Click Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the product. Send Fonts As… Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded. Figure 3-38 Send Fonts As… dialog box ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 175 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Always use TrueType fonts The following options are available: ● ● Sent TrueType fonts as:. This control offers the following settings: ● Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines. ● Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps. ● Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by the PS Emulation Driver. ● Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded. Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts. The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300 dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent. ● Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default. Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the screen. ● Send PostScript fonts as:. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the printer. The following options are available: ● In Native Format. Click this option to download the PostScript font files to the product before the document prints. ● Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values. Device Options tab features To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps: 176 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Options tab. Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver. Figure 3-39 Device Options tab NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re-opened. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Options tab, click Apply, close the Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs. The Device Options tab contains the following options: ● Available printer memory ● Printer features ● Using job-storage features when printing ● Installable options ● Restore Defaults NOTE Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or option that you have selected. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 177 HP traditional print drivers for Windows When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure. Available printer memory The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the product. If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory. Printer features The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change setting for list. The following are the printer-feature settings available on this tab: 178 ● HPPJLEncoding ● Job storage ● User Name ● PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) ● Print Color as Gray ● Collate ● Fit to Page ● Color Options ● Color Themes for RGB Color ● Color Themes for CMYK Color ● Edge Control ● Text Neutral Grays ● Text Halftone ● Graphic Neutral Grays ● Graphic Halftone ● Photographs Neutral Grays ● Photographs Halftone ● Watermark (Pages per Sheet) ● Print Watermark ● Watermark ● Watermark Font Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW ● Watermark Size ● Watermark Angle ● Watermark Style ● Watermark Color ● Watermark Intensity HPPJLEncoding The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature. Job storage The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the product. NOTE The job-storage feature requires at least 128 MB of total memory or the installation of a printer hard disk. The printer hard disk is available as an optional accessory for all models. ENWW ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job HP traditional print drivers for Windows If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 179 Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed: ● Quick Copy ● Stored Job ● Quick Copy. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel. NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. ● Proof and Hold. When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the product control panel. After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. ● Private Job. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After selecting Private Job from the Device Options tab, scroll to the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) control, click to select it, and then select a number from the Change setting for: PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) list. Repeat this process to select a number for each of the remaining three PIN digits. If you do not select a PIN, the default PIN of 0000 is used. After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. ● 180 Stored Job. To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled. Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel. The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents. You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, click Properties, click the Device Options tab, select Job Storage: from the Printer features list, and then select Disabled in the Change setting for: Job Storage list. To gain access to the Job Storage tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click Properties. User Name User Name. The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20. PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) HP traditional print drivers for Windows The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see Private Job. PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see Private Job. PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see Private Job. PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using this setting, see Private Job. Print Color as Gray The Print Color as Gray feature contains the following options: ● Off (default) ● On Collate The Collate feature contains the following options: ENWW ● On (turn off in application) ● Off HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 181 Fit to Page The Fit to Page feature contains the following options: ● Prompt User for correct size (default) ● Nearest Size and Scale ● Nearest Size and Crop ● Letter ● A4 Color Options The Color Options feature contains the following options: ● Automatic (default) ● Manual Color Themes for RGB Color The Color Themes for RGB Color feature contains the following options: ● Default (sRGB). Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (WC3). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics. ● Image Optimization (sRGB). Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement. ● Adobe RGB (1998). Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space. ● None. Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program in the operating system. NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system. ● Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output. The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one. 182 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware Color Themes for CMYK Color The Color Themes for CMYK Color feature contains the following options: ● Default CMYK+. Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints. ● SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of America and other countries/regions. ● Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions. ● DIC. DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/ regions. ● Custom Profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output (for example, to emulate a specific HP Color LaserJet printer). Download color profiles from the following Web site: HP traditional print drivers for Windows www.hp.com/go Edge Control The Edge Control feature contains the following options: ● Maximum ● Normal (default) ● Light ● Off Text Neutral Grays The Text Neutral Grays feature contains the following options: ● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text. ● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. Text Halftone The Text Halftone feature contains the following options: ENWW ● Smooth ● Detail HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 183 Graphic Neutral Grays The Graphic Neutral Grays feature contains the following options: ● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text. ● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. Graphic Halftone The Graphic Halftone feature contains the following options: ● Smooth ● Detail Photographs Neutral Grays The Photographs Neutral Grays feature contains the following options: ● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. ● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Text. Photographs Halftone The Photographs Halftone feature contains the following options: ● Smooth ● Detail Watermark (Pages per Sheet) The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options: ● 1 (default) ● >=2 Print Watermark The Print Watermark feature contains the following options: 184 ● No (default) ● All Pages ● First Page Only Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Watermark ● None (default) ● Draft ● Company Confidential ● Company Proprietary ● Company Private ● Confidential ● Copy ● Copyright ● File Copy ● Final ● For Internal Use Only ● Preliminary ● Proof ● Review Copy ● Sample ● Top Secret ● Urgent ● Custom HP traditional print drivers for Windows The Watermark feature contains the following options: Watermark Font The Watermark Font feature contains the following options: ● Courier Bold ● Helvetica Bold (default) ● Times Bold Watermark Size Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48 points. Watermark Angle Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default is a 45° angle. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 185 Watermark Style The Watermark Style feature contains the following options: ● Narrow Outline ● Medium Outline (default) ● Wide Outline ● Wide Halo Outline ● Filled Watermark Color The Watermark Color feature contains the following options: ● Gray ● Red ● Orange ● Yellow ● Green ● Blue ● Violet Watermark Intensity The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options: 186 ● Darkest ● Darker ● Dark ● Medium Dark ● Medium ● Medium Light ● Light ● Lighter ● Lightest Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Using job-storage features when printing To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Job Storage tab. 4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. Releasing a job-storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press 6. Press . 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. . . . If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press 9. Press and to select the number of copies to print. to print the job. Deleting a job-storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel. ENWW (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press . . HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 187 HP traditional print drivers for Windows (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. 5. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press . 6. Press . 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press to delete the job. Installable options This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available: ● Tray 3 ● Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ● Mopier Mode ● Printer Hard Disk ● Job storage ● VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product. Tray 3 This control specifies whether you have an additional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the printer. The default setting is Uninstalled. Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types: ● Transparency ● Labels ● Extra Heavy ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper ● Envelope NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page. 188 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Mopier Mode The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled. Printer Hard Disk When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode option are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Job storage When the job-storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel. HP traditional print drivers for Windows VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product. The following options are available: ● 64 MB (default) ● 96 MB ● 128 MB ● 160 MB ● 192 MB ● 256 MB ● 288 MB ● 320 MB ● 384 MB ● 512 MB Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values. PostScript tab features To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps: ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 189 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the PostScript tab. The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the PostScript tab. Figure 3-40 PostScript tab The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options: 190 ● PostScript output format ● PostScript header ● Print PostScript error information ● PostScript timeout values ● Advanced… ● Restore Defaults Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW PostScript output format Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options are available: ● PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents. ● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer. ● Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program. ● Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later. ● PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language. PostScript header ● Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network product or to a file on a disk. ● Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to the product only once. ● Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the product. This option is unavailable when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats. Print PostScript error information Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that Microsoft Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system administrator, or a product-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error message information is not included in EPS format. PostScript timeout values Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer. ENWW ● Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. ● Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 191 HP traditional print drivers for Windows Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the product each time you print a document. The following options are available: Advanced… Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the following figure. Figure 3-41 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box: ● PostScript Language Level ● Bitmap compression ● Data format ● Send CTRL+D before job ● Send CTRL+D after job PostScript Language Level The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that the product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 product, you would need to select level 1. You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the HP Color LaserJet 3800. Bitmap compression Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the product. If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a parallel port or if you are using a network product, click No bitmap compression. 192 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW Data format This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available: ● ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. ● Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the product sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format. If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch the product to Binary Communications Protocol (BCP) for future print jobs. ● Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. ● Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. Send CTRL+D before job This control specifies whether the product is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product that is connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box. Send CTRL+D after job This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network product, click to select the Send CTRL+D before job check box. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 193 HP traditional print drivers for Windows NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the product through a direct connection (a USB or parallel cable). 194 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows Introduction This chapter describes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit). NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems. You can control print jobs from several places: ● the product control panel ● the software program print dialog box ● the driver user interface When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver This chapter also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three. This chapter contains the following sections: ENWW ● Access to print drivers ● Help system ● Advanced tab features ● Paper/Quality tab features Introduction 195 HP unidrivers for Windows Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel settings. 196 ● Effects tab features ● Finishing tab features ● Job Storage tab features ● Color tab features ● Services tab features ● Device Settings tab features ● About tab features Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Access to print drivers Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways. To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps: 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open. You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable options can be configured in Properties driver tabs. Printing Preferences driver tabs The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. ● Advanced ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Job Storage ● Color ● Services HP unidrivers for Windows The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available: The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Device Settings tab. ENWW Access to print drivers 197 Properties driver tabs This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties tabs, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. The following Properties print-driver tabs are available: 198 ● General ● Sharing ● Ports ● Advanced ● Color Management ● Security ● Device Settings ● About Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Help system The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver. What's this? Help Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Incompatible Print Settings messages NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities. In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print Settings message. ENWW Help system 199 HP unidrivers for Windows Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls. Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message To accept the change that was just made, click the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK. NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product. 200 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Advanced tab features To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps: 1. click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Advanced tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab. Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab The Advanced tab contains the following controls: ● ENWW Paper/Output Advanced tab features 201 ● Graphic ● Document Options Paper/Output The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls: ● Copy Count setting ● Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count) Copy Count Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program. The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1. Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible. Collated The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1. When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together. This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated. 202 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Graphic The Graphic setting contains the following controls: ● Image Color Management settings ● True Type Font settings Image Color Management This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics. ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when they are printed. The following options are available: ● ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print color graphics. ● To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled. ● If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System. ● If you want the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document. ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image that looks best on the printed page. ● If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics. ● For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the contrast. ● If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof. ● If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match. True Type Font Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts. Document Options The Document Options setting contains the following controls: ● Advanced Printing Features ● Print Optimizations Advanced Printing Features When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available, ENWW Advanced tab features 203 HP unidrivers for Windows ● depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled. Print Optimizations NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off. PostScript Options NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver. Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu: ● Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting. ● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. This option is useful if you want to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer. ● Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from another program. ● Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later. Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu: ● Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best. ● Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font. ● Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font. ● Native TrueTypeIf the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the TrueType font as an outline font. Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu: ● 3 ● 2 ● 1 The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone with a level-1 printer, select 1. 204 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu: ● Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the printer. ● No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs. Printer Features The Printer Features setting contains the following controls: ● Print All Text as Black The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. ● Send True Type as Bitmap NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts. ● Graphics Mode NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver. ● ● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting. ● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases. Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown. When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting: ENWW ● Letterhead ● Preprinted Advanced tab features 205 HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings: NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit. ● Raster Compression NOTE The Raster Compression option is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver. Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method: ● Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use. ● Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.) ● Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost). Layout Options The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting. Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last. NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change. 206 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Paper/Quality tab features To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps: 1. click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Paper/Quality tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab. Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets: ● ENWW Print Task Quick Sets Paper/Quality tab features 207 ● Paper Options ● Use Different Paper/Covers ● Document preview image ● HP Digital Imaging Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets setting: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Job Storage ● Color Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs. NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu: ● Default Print Settings ● User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored. Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK. The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings. 208 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer ENWW Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not selected Yes Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not selected Yes Booklet Layout Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1 page per sheet Yes Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Orientation Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes Rotate by 180 degrees Finishing tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes Resizing Options Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Print document on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes Size to print on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes Scale to Fit Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Unavailable, selected Yes % of Normal Size Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes Watermarks Effects tab (none) Yes Watermarks First Page Only Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not selected Yes Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Watermark Message Angle Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Diagonal Yes2 Watermark Message Angle (angle) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected, 52 degrees Yes Watermark Font Name Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Arial Yes2 Watermark Font Color Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Gray Yes2 Watermark Font Shading Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Very Light Yes2 Paper/Quality tab features HP unidrivers for Windows Yes 209 Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued) 210 Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 Watermark Font Size Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box 80 No Watermark Font Style Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Regular Yes2 Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Available, not selected No Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes Economode Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box Available, unselected Yes Contrast Enhancement Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box Available, Off No Digital Flash Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box Available, Off No SmartFocus Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box Available, Off No Sharpness Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box Available, Off No Smoothing Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box Available, Off No Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message: for example, Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer No Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off is selected No Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected No Windows User Name Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected (Windows User Name appears in field) No Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not selected No Display Job ID when Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options printing group box Unavailable, selected No Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable, Automatically selected No Automatic (color options) Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes Manual (color options) Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes Print in Grayscale Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes Edge Control Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab) Normal Yes Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Black Only Yes Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Detail Yes Neutral Grays (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Black Only Yes Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Detail Yes Neutral Grays (photographs) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) 4-Color Yes Halftone (photographs) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click Settings on Color tab.) Detail Yes RGB Color Color tab, Color Themes group box Default (sRGB) Yes 1 2 These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw. Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide. When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings: ENWW ● On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified. ● On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON. ● On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON. Paper/Quality tab features 211 HP unidrivers for Windows Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued) ● On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet. ● On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down. Type new Quick Set name here By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete. NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones. Paper Options The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default. Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box 212 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order: ● Size is ● Custom Paper Size ● Source is ● Type is ● Use Different Paper/Covers Size is The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes. When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes. NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document. When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray. For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this STR. Custom Paper Size The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 213 HP unidrivers for Windows When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see the Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter. Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box Name Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size. The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions: ● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/ Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size. ● If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the default name of "Custom." ● If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed. If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning. Paper size The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper Size group box. Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed. The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. 214 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Units To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or Millimeters). Custom width and height control limits The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device. Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches) Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Tray 3 (500-sheet) Duplexing unit Source is The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. ● Automatically select ● Printer Auto Select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 ● Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray) ● Tray 2 (250-sheet tray) ● Tray 3 (500-sheet tray) HP unidrivers for Windows The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product: The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 215 Type is The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually Plain. No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver. The following standard types appear in the list: ● Unspecified ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Transparency ● Prepunched ● Labels ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Light 60-75 g/m2(16.4–20.5 lb) ● Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb) ● Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb) ● Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb) ● Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb) ● Rough ● Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb) ● Tough Paper (Glossy Film) ● Envelope The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR. When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray. 216 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Use Different Paper/Covers You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options: ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages ● Last Page ● Back Cover NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections. Front Cover Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document. HP unidrivers for Windows The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options. Figure 4-6 Front Cover options ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 217 The following are the Front Cover options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program. First Page Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. 218 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Figure 4-7 First Page options The following are the First Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 219 HP unidrivers for Windows The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. Figure 4-8 Other Pages options The following are the Other Pages options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. 220 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Figure 4-9 Last Page options The following are the Last Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document. The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 221 HP unidrivers for Windows The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter. Figure 4-10 Back Cover options The following are the Back Cover options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option. NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. 222 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Color Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. HP Digital Imaging HP unidrivers for Windows Click HP Digital Imaging to open the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. Figure 4-11 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box The following settings can be adjusted on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box: ENWW ● Contrast Enhancement ● Digital Flash ● SmartFocus ● Sharpness ● Smoothing Paper/Quality tab features 223 The HP Digital Imaging settings should be used only on high-resolution images (600 dpi or higher) that are printed on photograph-quality paper. These settings are not recommended for text. For the Contrast Enhancement, Digital Flash, SmartFocus, and Smoothing settings, the following controls are available: ● Automatic check box ● A slide bar ranging from Off to High The SharpFocus settings are Off and On. Use the following controls to enhance digital images: 224 ● Contrast Enhancement. Use the Contrast Enhancement setting to increase image contrast for a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in which much of the image content is compressed into a small, dynamic range of pixel values). Flat images can result from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations. ● Digital Flash. Use the Digital Flash setting to adjust lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out detail without degrading other features in the image. ● Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness feature to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then applies a filter to enhance detail. ● SmartFocus. Use the SmartFocus setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras can be compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when printed. SmartFocus upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these artifacts. ● Smoothing. Just as many images benefit from increased sharpness, many images are improved by smoothing, which decreases noise artifacts that digital cameras or scanners often create. When you select Smoothing, the filter locates areas that contain abrupt changes in pixel value by comparison with surrounding pixels (which denotes noise) and then applies a filter to smooth the output. Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Effects tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab. Figure 4-12 Effects tab The Effects tab contains the following controls: ENWW ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Resizing Options Effects tab features 225 ● Document preview image ● Watermarks Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/ Quality tab features section of this STR. Resizing Options The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls: ● Actual Size (default) ● Print Document On setting ● Scale to Fit option ● % of Normal Size setting Actual Size Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size. Print Document On Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size. The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions: ● The % of Normal Size value is not 100. ● The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media. Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter. 226 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Figure 4-13 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size. % of Normal Size The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer. The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected). Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview. You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box. The following settings disable % of Normal Size: ● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1 Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ENWW ● Paper/Quality ● Effects Effects tab features 227 HP unidrivers for Windows The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%. ● Finishing ● Color Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver: ● (none) ● Confidential ● Draft ● SAMPLE The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image. When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)". Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page). Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. Figure 4-14 Watermark Details dialog box 228 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes. Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. Current watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark. NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled. To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark. The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on). Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available: ENWW ● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. ● Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. ● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle. Effects tab features 229 HP unidrivers for Windows Watermark Message Font Attributes Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font. The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls: ● Name The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent. ● Color The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections: ● ● Gray ● Red ● Yellow ● Green ● Cyan ● Blue ● Magenta Shading The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu: ● Lightest ● Very Light (default) ● Light ● Medium Light ● Medium ● Medium Dark ● Dark ● Very Dark ● Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select Darkest to produce a black watermark. ● 230 Size Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. ● Style The following settings are available: ● Regular ● Bold ● Italic ● Bold Italic The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular. Default watermark settings The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks. Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. ENWW Effects tab features 231 HP unidrivers for Windows Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Finishing tab. Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the Finishing tab. Figure 4-15 Finishing tab The Finishing tab contains the following controls: 232 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Document Options Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW ● Document preview image ● Orientation Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features. Document Options The Document Options group box contains the following controls: ● Print on Both Sides ● Flip Pages Up ● Booklet layout ● Pages per Sheet ● Print Page Borders ● Page Order Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist: ● ENWW Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types: ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Extra Heavy ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper HP unidrivers for Windows ● Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes: ● Statement ● Envelope #10 ● Envelope DL ● Envelope C5 ● Envelope B5 Finishing tab features 233 ● Envelope Monarch ● Double Postscard (JIS) Automatically printing on both sides The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models: ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dn ● HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver. All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types: ● Prepunched ● Preprinted ● Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled. To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic. Manually printing on both sides ● Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media. Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported. Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side: 234 ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW ● Prepunched ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Rough NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See Installable Options in the Device Settings tab features section of this chapter. If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) option on the Device Settings tab. Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side. To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps: Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box. 2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print. 3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure. HP unidrivers for Windows 1. Figure 4-16 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function. ENWW Finishing tab features 235 Flip Pages Up Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab. Table 4-4 Page orientation Orientation (Finishing tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together. Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar. Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book. Booklet layout The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab: ● Left Edge Binding ● Right Edge Binding When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per Sheet section of this chapter for more information. Book and Booklet Printing The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports book and booklet printing. A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages, Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features in this chapter. A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings. 236 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW To print a booklet Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs. 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. 4. Click the Finishing tab. 5. Select the Print on Both Sides check box. 6. In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding). 7. Click OK in the print driver. 8. Click OK in the print dialog box to print. Pages per Sheet ● 1 page per sheet (this is the default) ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet NOTE When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable. Print Page Borders Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1. Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page. Page Order The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections: ENWW ● Right, then Down ● Down, then Right Finishing tab features 237 HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings: ● Left, then Down ● Down, then Left The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure. Figure 4-17 Page-order preview images ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Color Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait. NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation. 238 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW The Orientation group box contains three options: ● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media. ● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media. ● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media. HP unidrivers for Windows You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image. ENWW Finishing tab features 239 Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Job Storage tab. NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured. Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections. The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features. After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Automatic Configuration section in this chapter. To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps: 240 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB, or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed. 8. If a hard disk has been installed, select Installed for the Printer Hard Disk under Installable Options, and then select Installed in the drop-down menu. 9. Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available. Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the jobstorage feature, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Select Job Storage. 8. Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. NOTE When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible. If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job ● Quick Copy ● Stored Job HP unidrivers for Windows Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed: The following figure shows the Job Storage tab. ENWW Job Storage tab features 241 Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab The Job Storage tab contains the following controls: NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing. 242 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Status group box ● Job Storage Mode ● Require PIN ● Job Notification Options ● User Name ● Job Name Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW ● Using job-storage features when printing Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/ Quality tab features section of this STR. Status group box The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab. Job Storage Mode Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options: ● Off ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job ● Quick Copy ● Stored Job These options and the settings that control them are described below. When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product. Proof and Hold To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled. When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel. After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. ENWW Job Storage tab features 243 HP unidrivers for Windows Off NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Private Job To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job. After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. Quick Copy To use the Quick Copy option, a printer hard disk must be installed, and the job-storage feature must be enabled. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel. NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product. Stored Job To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled. Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel. 244 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents. A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private. NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job the previous section. Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A printer hard disk is required for Private stored jobs. Require PIN Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job. The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job. Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed. The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location. User Name Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings: ENWW ● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job. The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options. ● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. Job Storage tab features 245 HP unidrivers for Windows Job Notification Options Job Name Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings: ● This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. ● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display. The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with . The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display. If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name. Using job-storage features when printing To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. 246 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Job Storage tab. 4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Releasing a job-storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press 6. Press . 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. . . . If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press 9. Press and to select the number of copies to print. to print the job. Deleting a job-storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product . control panel, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press 6. Press . 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this press step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. . . If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. ENWW Press to delete the job. Job Storage tab features 247 HP unidrivers for Windows . Color tab features To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps: 1. click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Color tab. Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure. Figure 4-19 Color tab The Color tab contains the following sets of controls: ● 248 Print Task Quick Sets Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW ● Color Options ● Color Themes ● Document preview image Print Task Quick Sets The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Paper tab features. Color Options Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls: ● Automatic option (default) ● Manual option ● Settings button (Click this button to open the Color Settings dialog box.) ● Print in Grayscale check box Automatic Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs. Manual To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Custom" settings. ENWW Color tab features 249 HP unidrivers for Windows To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color Settings dialog box appears. Figure 4-20 Color Settings dialog box The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls: ● General ● ● ● ● Edge Control Text ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone Graphics ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone Photographs ● Neutral Grays ● Halftone General Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing. 250 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components: ● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness ● Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects ● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges The Edge Control option offers four settings: ● Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off. ● Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On. ● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On. ● Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On. Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs. The following options are available: ● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components. ● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs. The Halftone setting controls the selection of a product-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone options are available: ● Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail. ● Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills. Color Themes The Color Themes group box contains the following settings: ENWW Color tab features 251 HP unidrivers for Windows Halftone ● Default (sRGB) ● Image Optimization (sRGB) ● Adobe RGB (1998) ● None ● Custom Profile Default (sRGB) Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics. Image Optimization (sRGB) Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement. Adobe RGB (1998) Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB , turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space. None Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system. NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system. Custom Profile Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output. The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the HP LaserJet 4650 printer. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one. You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware 252 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Color HP unidrivers for Windows Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. ENWW Color tab features 253 Services tab features To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Services tab. The Services tab is shown in the following figure. Figure 4-21 Services tab The Services tab contains the following group boxes: 254 ● Internet Services ● Device services Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Internet Services The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following selections: ● Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting. ● Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer support. ● Product manuals. View or download HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer manuals. ● Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and most up-to-date print drivers are installed. ● Color printing access/usage. Find information about enabling and disabling color printing and tracking color print-job usage. ● Order supplies. Shop online for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supplies. If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web page. Device services Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. For more information, see HP Embedded Web Server. HP unidrivers for Windows Click the Print color usage job log icon to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and applications that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. ENWW Services tab features 255 Device Settings tab features The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device Settings tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab. Figure 4-22 Device Settings tab The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The Device Settings tab contains the following controls: ● Form to Tray Assignment options ● Font Substitution Table option ● ● 256 External Fonts option Installable Options options Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Form to Tray Assignment A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned. Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available. The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting. The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab. Configuring the trays 1. Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list. 2. Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays. 4. Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab. Font Substitution Table Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts. HP unidrivers for Windows Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings. ENWW Device Settings tab features 257 Figure 4-23 Font Substitution Table External Fonts NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts. Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. 258 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Figure 4-24 HP Font Installer dialog box Installing external fonts 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the name of the product. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears. 8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. 9. Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be Added window. 10. Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window. 11. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box. Removing external fonts ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the name of the product. Device Settings tab features 259 HP unidrivers for Windows Follow these steps to install external fonts. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears. 8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. 9. Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed. 10. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box. PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab. Available PostScript Memory This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the product control panel, follow these steps: (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press . (the up button) and 3. Press and 4. Press (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. to print the configuration page. Output Protocol This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available: ● ASCII (default) ● TBCP ● Binary When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. 260 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes. Send Ctrl-D After Each Job This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change Yes to No. Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available: ● Yes ● No. This is the default setting. Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available: ● Yes ● No. This is the default setting. This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are available: ● Yes. This is the default setting. ● No Job Timeout This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. Wait Timeout This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. ENWW Device Settings tab features 261 HP unidrivers for Windows Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels. Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels. Installable Options This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available: ● Automatic Configuration (Off by default) ● Tray 3 ● Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ● Allow Manual Duplexing ● Printer Memory ● Printer Hard Disk ● Job Storage ● Mopier Mode ● Postscript Pull through (PS Emulation Unidriver only) Automatic Configuration Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab. If you have more than one driver installed for the product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific product model. 262 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW Tray 3 This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an additional 500-sheet tray, installed on the product. The default setting is Not Installed. Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default. NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page. Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment. This setting is enabled by default. Printer Memory This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory. When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Job storage When Job Storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel. Mopier Mode The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled. ENWW Device Settings tab features 263 HP unidrivers for Windows Printer Hard Disk When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiplepage print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language (PJL) command directing the product to make the specified number of copies. When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through the network for each copy. Mopier mode and collation Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to Disabled. Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation. To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected. The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear. Table 4-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings Mopier mode Application collation Driver collation Expected result Disabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Disabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Enabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Enabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript 264 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these options without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems. HP unidrivers for Windows NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program. ENWW Device Settings tab features 265 About tab features The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties. 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the product name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the About tab. The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components. The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure. Figure 4-25 About tab The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined. 266 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW 5 Installing Windows printing-system components Introduction The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft® Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see Supported operating systems. This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printingsystem software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics: ● Windows ● Font support ● General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ● ● ● Installing from the printing-system CD ● Installing from a network or from downloaded files Detailed Windows installation ● Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ● Installing print drivers by using Add Printer ● Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ● Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003 Setting a default printer ENWW Introduction 267 Installation in Windows NOTE If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer. Font support The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the product. Basic fonts Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product: ● Arial ● Courier New Italic ● Times New Roman Italic ● Arial Italic ● Courier New Bold ● Times New Roman Bold ● Arial Bold ● Courier New Bold Italic ● Times New Roman Bold Italic ● Arial Bold Italic ● Symbol ● Wingdings ● Courier New ● Times New Roman Default fonts The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software. Table 5-1 Default fonts 268 Font name Font style File name Albertus Extra Bold Regular ALBR85W.TTF Albertus Medium Regular ALBR55W.TTF Antique Olive Regular OLVR55W.TTF Antique Olive Bold OLVR75W.TTF Antique Olive Italic OLVR56W.TTF CG Omega Regular CGOR45W.TTF CG Omega Bold CGOR65W.TTF Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name CG Omega Bold Italic CGOR66W.TTF CG Omega Italic CGOR46W.TTF CG Times Regular CGTR45W.TTF CG Times Bold CGTR65W.TTF CG Times Bold Italic CGTR66W.TTF CG Times Italic CGTR46W.TTF Clarendon Condensed Bold CLAR67W.TTF Coronet Regular CORONET.TTF CourierPS Regular CPSR45W.TTF CourierPS Bold CPSR65W.TTF CourierPS Bold Oblique CPSR66W.TTF CourierPS Oblique CPSR46W.TTF Garamond Antiqua GARR45W.TTF Garamond Halbfett GARR65W.TTF Garamond Kursiv GARR46W.TTF Garamond Kursiv Halbfett GARR66W.TTF Helvetica® Regular HELR45W.TTF Helvetica Bold HELR65W.TTF Helvetica Bold Oblique HELR66W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Regular HELR47W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold HELR67W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique HELR68W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Oblique HELR48W.TTF Helvetica Oblique HELR46W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book AVGR45W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique AVGR46W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Regular AVGR65W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique AVGR66W.TTF ITC Bookman Light Regular BOKR35W.TTF ITC Bookman Light Italic BOKR36W.TTF ITC Bookman Demi Regular BOKR75W.TTF ITC Bookman Demi Italic BOKR76W.TTF ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CHANC___.TTF ITC Zapf Dingbats Regular DINGS___.TTF Font support 269 Installation in Windows Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued) Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued) Font name Font style File name Letter Gothic Regular LETR45W.TTF Letter Gothic Bold LETR65W.TTF Letter Gothic Italic LETR46W.TTF Marigold Regular MARIGOLD.TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold NCSR75W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic NCSR76W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Italic NCSR56W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Roman NCSR55W.TTF Palatino Bold PALR65W.TTF Palatino Bold Italic PALR66W.TTF Palatino Italic PALR46W.TTF Palatino Roman PALR45W.TTF SymbolPS Regular SYMPS__.TTF Times* Bold TIMR65W.TTF Times Bold Italic TIMR66W.TTF Times Italic TIMR46W.TTF Times Roman TIMR45W.TTF Univers Bold UNVR65W.TTF Univers Bold Italic UNVR66W.TTF Univers Condensed Bold UNVR67W.TTF Univers Condensed Bold Italic UNVR68W.TTF Univers Condensed Medium UNVR57W.TTF Univers Condensed Medium Italic UNVR58W.TTF Univers Medium UNVR55W.TTF Univers Medium Italic UNVR56W.TTF Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD. Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts 270 Font name Font style File name Albertus MT Regular PS_12639.TTF Albertus MT Italic PS_12640.TTF Albertus MT Lt Regular PS_14530.TTF Antique Olive CompactPS Regular PS_11120.TTF Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name Antique Olive Roman Regular PS_11119.TTF Antique Olive Roman Bold PS_11118.TTF Antique Olive Roman Italic PS_11846.TTF Apple Chancery Italic PS_24516.TTF Bodoni Poster Regular PS_12704.TTF Bodoni PosterCompressed Regular PS_14508.TTF BodoniPS Regular PS_12581.TTF BodoniPS Bold PS_12585.TTF BodoniPS Bold Italic PS_12586.TTF BodoniPS Italic PS_12582.TTF Candid Regular PS_24517.TTF Chicago Regular PS_24518.TTF Clarendon Light Regular PS_14513.TTF ClarendonPS Regular PS_10269.TTF ClarendonPS Bold PS_12968.TTF Cooper Black Regular PS_10369.TTF Cooper Black Italic PS_10370.TTF Copperplate32bc Regular PS_14514.TTF Copperplate33bc Regular PS_14515.TTF CoronetPS Italic PS_10249.TTF Eurostile Regular PS_10267.TTF Eurostile Bold Regular PS_10268.TTF Eurostile ExtendedTwo Bold PS_14512.TTF Eurostile ExtendedTwo Regular PS_14511.TTF Geneva Regular PS_24509.TTF GillSans Regular PS_13872.TTF GillSans Bold PS_13874.TTF GillSans Bold Italic PS_13875.TTF GillSans Condensed Regular PS_14053.TTF GillSans Condensed Bold PS_14054.TTF GillSans ExtraBold Regular PS_14051.TTF GillSans Italic PS_13873.TTF GillSans Light Italic PS_13871.TTF GillSans Light Regular PS_13870.TTF Font support 271 Installation in Windows Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) 272 Font name Font style File name Goudy Bold PS_12544.TTF Goudy Bold Italic PS_10695.TTF Goudy Regular PS_12542.TTF Goudy ExtraBold Regular PS_12545.TTF Goudy Italic PS_12543.TTF Helvetica Condensed Regular PS_14526.TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold PS_14528.TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic PS_14529.TTF Helvetica Condensed Italic PS_14527.TTF Hoefler Text Regular PS_24519.TTF Hoefler Text Black Regular PS_24521.TTF Hoefler Text Black Italic PS_24522.TTF Hoefler Text Italic PS_24520.TTF Hoefler Text Ornaments Regular PS_24523.TTF Joanna MT Regular PS_14503.TTF Joanna MT Bold PS_14505.TTF Joanna MT Bold Italic PS_14506.TTF Joanna MT Italic PS_14504.TTF Letter Gothic Italic PS_13778.TTF Letter GothicPS Regular PS_13777.TTF Letter GothicPS Bold PS_13779.TTF Letter GothicPS Bold Italic PS_13780.TTF Lubalin Graph Regular PS_12675.TTF Lubalin Graph Bold PS_12677.TTF Lubalin Graph Bold Italic PS_12625.TTF Lubalin Graph Italic PS_12623.TTF MarigoldPS Regular PS_94073.TTF Mona Lisa Recut Regular PS_14525.TTF Monaco Regular PS_24524.TTF New York Regular PS_24510.TTF Optima Regular PS_12506.TTF Optima Bold PS_12510.TTF Optima Bold Italic PS_12511.TTF Optima Italic PS_12507.TTF Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name Oxford Italic PS_14072.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Italic PS_11546.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Regular PS_11545.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold PS_11547.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic PS_11548.TTF Taffy Regular PS_14507.TTF Univers 45 Light Regular PS_13501.TTF Univers 45 Light Bold PS_14023.TTF Univers 45 Light Bold Italic PS_14024.TTF Univers 45 Light Italic PS_13502.TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold PS_14030.TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold Italic PS_14040.TTF Univers 55 Regular PS_14021.TTF Univers 55 Italic PS_14022.TTF Univers 57 Condensed Regular PS_14029.TTF Univers 57 Condensed Italic PS_14039.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold PS_13548.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Regular PS_13547.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic PS_14481.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Italic PS_14480.TTF Font support 273 Installation in Windows Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) Installation instructions The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows operating systems. General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see the Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this chapter. If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems. For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software. When the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system. Installing from the printing-system CD Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing system from the CD that came with the product. 1. Quit all software programs. 2. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. NOTE If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD. 3. Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts. Installing from a network or from downloaded files Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file. 274 1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file. 2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file. 3. Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation. Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Detailed Windows installation This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a Basic, Full, or Custom Installation. Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about the installation process. Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections. After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence. To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation dialog box. 1. When you click Cancel, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?” Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted. Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box 3. ENWW Click Finish to close the installation screens. Installation instructions 275 Installation in Windows 2. The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections. Modifying a pre-existing installation If an HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on the selections you make. Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation. Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems. The Full Installation includes the following components: ● HP Color LaserJet 3800 PCL 6 Driver ● HP Easy Printer Care ● Screen Fonts ● Install Notes ● User Guide When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears. Figure 5-3 Language Selection dialog box NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD. 276 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu. Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears. Figure 5-4 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Setup Wizard dialog box Figure 5-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System ENWW Installation instructions 277 Installation in Windows NOTE The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen appears. When installing the product on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-6 Software License Agreement dialog box The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to proceed with the installation. The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box 278 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer does not support infrared connections. If you click USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option. If you click Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the Installation Type dialog box opens. To continue with the default installation sequence, see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box. NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation. If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over the network, click Wired Networking in the Printer Connection dialog box. For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer. NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that comes with the print server. Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 279 Installation in Windows Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. NOTE If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for available HP Color LaserJet 3800 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box. However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box), depending on the configuration of the network. NOTE The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search. If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-9 Firewall Detected dialog box If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. 280 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall, click Next. The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box). ENWW Installation instructions 281 Installation in Windows If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box Select the printer that you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box). If the printer is that you want to install is not listed and you want the installer to continue searching network subnet masks, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen appears. Click Next to perform another search. If the printer that you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box and follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address. If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure. 282 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box). Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 283 Installation in Windows If you click Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box). If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. WARNING! When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button, you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator. Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box). If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box). The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selectedNo, I want to install a different printer in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the product over the network, is shown in the following figure. 284 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box If you click Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens (see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box). If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 285 Installation in Windows If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box). You can specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information: ● Hardware Address (MAC) ● IP Address ● IP Hostname When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer Found dialog box opens (see Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box). If you clicked Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box To install the printer by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the product hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the product TCP/IP address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. 286 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box). Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box). ENWW Installation instructions 287 Installation in Windows NOTE If you selected Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next) and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer and reported in the Printer Found screen. Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box). If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens (see Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box). Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box 288 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from product to product. Click Basic Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) screen fonts. If you click Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box). If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select an install state for that feature. Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog box. Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver). Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens. ENWW Installation instructions 289 Installation in Windows To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears. Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box All the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box. In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears. Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box 290 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears. Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box All the software that is available in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box. ENWW Installation instructions 291 Installation in Windows Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box. Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box Click Install to start the installation process. Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs: ● General ● Sharing Figure 5-26 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field. 292 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank. If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box. Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network. Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click the Shared as: option and type the printer name in the text field. NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by clicking Shared as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems. If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens. If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. ENWW Installation instructions 293 Installation in Windows NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs. Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box NOTE If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK. The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or Windows Me. In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printingsystem software folders and files. The Installing HP Color LaserJet 3800 dialog box is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills. Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software. At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked. 294 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard. NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish. Figure 5-31 HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box NOTE If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 over a direct connection and HP Easy Printer Care was not installed earlier, an option for installing HP Easy Printer Care appears on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box. ENWW Installation instructions 295 Installation in Windows The HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box appears. To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. The Test Page dialog box appears. Figure 5-32 Test Page dialog box If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot… to open screens that guide you through options to find the source of the problem. If you have access to the Internet, you can register your product online. In the Congratulations dialog box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site. 296 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-33 HP Registration screen Installing print drivers by using Add Printer 1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows. In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. 3. ENWW Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process. Installation instructions 297 Installation in Windows Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows: If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature. 1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. 3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process. 4. Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as shown in the following list: ● To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file: \ \Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc90xmd.inf ● To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file: \ \Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc90xmd.inf ● To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file: \ \Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc90xmd.inf 5. Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process. Installer Customization Wizard for Windows Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the HP Color LaserJet 3800 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections: ● Language ● Operating system ● Print drivers ● Components NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 Running the Installer Customization Wizard The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI) with its own interface. Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file (RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for 298 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 To run the Installer Customization Wizard 1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard. The Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen appears. To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section. Figure 5-34 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen Dialogs Figure 5-35 Language Selection dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 299 Installation in Windows Click Next in the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard dialog box. The Language Selection dialog box appears. Select the language and then click OK. The Software Licence Agreement dialog box appears. Figure 5-36 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons). Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to open the Language dialog box. Figure 5-37 Language dialog box 300 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed in order to restore the option to install other languages. The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language that is available on the CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection is recorded in the response file. Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure. Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen. Figure 5-38 Printer Port dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 301 Installation in Windows Click Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you click Network Path and click the Browse, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens. Figure 5-39 Browse for Printer dialog box Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box. In the Printer Port dialog box, click Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer Connection dialog box. The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. Figure 5-40 Printer Connection dialog box Click the type of connection that you are using and then click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. See Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box. 302 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW In the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used. Figure 5-41 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box Click IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address. Click IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname. Click Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid hardware address. After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens (see Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box). If you click Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box. To specify a different name, click Specify: and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog box. ENWW Installation instructions 303 Installation in Windows For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name (as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name. Figure 5-42 Port Creation Options dialog box Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port. Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and click Next. NOTE To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see Determining the current level of firmware. Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box 304 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver). To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears. Figure 5-44 Driver Details dialog box All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box. ENWW Installation instructions 305 Installation in Windows On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears. Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears. Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box All the software that you selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box. 306 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large, but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate. To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box ENWW Installation instructions 307 Installation in Windows Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to c:\ . NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing. Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs: ● General ● Sharing Figure 5-49 Printer Properties General tab On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field. Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank. If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box. Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network. The Sharing tab is shown in the following figure. 308 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 5-50 Printer Properties Sharing tab On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click Shared as: and type the printer name in the text field. NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs. Figure 5-51 Additional Drivers dialog box If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK. ENWW Installation instructions 309 Installation in Windows If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-52 Installing dialog box This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills. Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software. At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked. When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 5-53 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard. 310 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish. Distribution The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted. You can perform the silent installation in two ways: ● Customized silent installer ● Command-line silent installer The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package. The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system components that are included in the Full Installation. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003 The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the product on the network. Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver. This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft. To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000 Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF file. Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later. In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server. ENWW Installation instructions 311 Installation in Windows Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types. However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server. In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased. www.techweb.boi.hp.com Setting a default printer This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. 1. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home). 312 2. Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer. 3. Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option. Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW Installation in Macintosh 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems Introduction The HP Color LaserJet 3800 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see Supported operating systems This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printingsystem software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics: ENWW ● Macintosh component descriptions ● Installing the Macintosh printing system ● Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system ● In-box disk layout ● Mac OS X Classic installation ● Mac OS X installation Introduction 313 Macintosh component descriptions The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers: ● PPDs for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later ● PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later) HP LaserJet PPDs In Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder. In Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/ Resources: .lproj, where is the appropriate localized folder. The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems. PDEs Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings. HP Embedded Web Server Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks: ● Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings. ● Set a password for the product. ● From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing-software help). Install notes This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printingsystem software, and technical assistance. Online help This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center. 314 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer uses previously installed system fonts when it is installed on a Macintosh computer. ENWW Macintosh component descriptions 315 Installation in Macintosh Screen fonts Installing the Macintosh printing system On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer. NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3800, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh operating systems do not support parallel connections. The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language. NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS X Classic installation or Mac OS X installation. Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS 1. Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive. NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window. 2. Double-click the icon for your OS. For instance, if you are installing the printer in any version of Mac OS X, double-click the Mac OS X icon. If you are installing the printer in Mac Classic or any version of Mac OS 9, click the Mac OS 9 icon. NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only). 3. The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation. NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled. 4. When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish setting up the product: ● Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic). ● Set up a printer with Mac OS X. The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The following table shows the print setup tools that are available. 316 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems Operating System HP LaserJet Utility LaserWriter 8 Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) x x Print Center Mac OS X V10.1.5 x Mac OS X V10.2.8 x Mac OS X V10.3.9 Mac OS X V10.4.1 Printer Setup Utility x x x Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) ENWW 1. Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu. 2. Click the appropriate print setup tool (see Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems) on the left side of the Chooser dialog box. 3. Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required. 4. Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click Create. For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the selection is HP Color LaserJet 470014. Installing the Macintosh printing system 317 Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Printer Browser or the Printer Setup Utility, depending on the version of the Macintosh operating system. Figure 6-1 Printer Browser screen 318 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh 2. Select the product and click Add. The Installable Options screen appears. Figure 6-2 Installable Options screen ENWW 3. If the product has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select Installed in the Tray 3 drop-down menu. 4. In the Memory Configuration: drop-down menu, select the amount of memory that is installed in the product: ● 64 MB RAM ● 96 MB RAM ● 128 MB RAM ● 160 MB RAM ● 192 MB RAM Installing the Macintosh printing system 319 256 MB RAM ● 288 MB RAM ● 320 MB RAM ● 384 MB RAM ● 512 MB RAM 5. If the product has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn models), select the Duplex Unit check box. 6. In the Printer Disk: drop-down menu, select the appropriate option: 7. 8. 320 ● ● None ● RAM Disk ● Hard Disk (A hard disk is an optional feature for all HP Color LaserJet 3800 models.) In the Paper Matching: drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Prompt User for correct size ● Nearest Size & Scale ● Nearest Size & Crop After you have selected the settings in the Installable Options screen, click Continue. The Printer Browser screen shows the following tabs: ● Default Browser ● IP Printer Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh Figure 6-3 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab 9. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. 10. In the Location: field, type the product location. 11. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options: ● Auto Select (This is the default setting.) ● Generic PostScript Printer ● Other (Select the appropriate brand name.) 12. Click Add to save the settings. ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 321 13. If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search dialog box opens. Figure 6-4 More Printers screen 14. Use the drop-down menus to change the search settings. Select the printer that you want to install and click Add. To cancel the search, click Cancel. 322 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh 15. To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab. Figure 6-5 IP Printer tab 16. In the Search field in the upper-right corner, select one of the following options: ● All (this is the default setting) ● AppleTalk ● Bonjour ● FireWire® ● Open Directory ● Shared ● USB 17. In the Protocol: drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ENWW ● Internet Printing Protocol – IPP ● Line Printer Daemon – LPD ● HP Jet Direct – Socket Installing the Macintosh printing system 323 18. If you know the host name or TCP/IP address of the product, type it in the Address: field. (It might also be available on the drop-down menu.) 19. If you know the queue path of the printer, type it in the Queue: field. 20. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. 21. In the Location: field, type the product location. 22. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options: ● Auto Select (This is the default setting.) ● Generic PostScript Printer ● Other (Select the appropriate brand name.) 23. Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List. Figure 6-6 Printer List screen 324 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh 24. Click the product name to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the product has been installed. Figure 6-7 Select Printer screen Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3 1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility. 2. Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later). 3. When the New Printer drivers detected pop-up box appears, click OK. 4. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for the product. 5. Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for the product. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select the product zone; or if you are using IP Printing, type a TCP/IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 3800. NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to add. 6. Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer appears in the Printer List. 7. To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu. NOTE This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections that use Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options. 8. ENWW Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box. Installing the Macintosh printing system 325 Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x 326 1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility. 2. Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK. 3. Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area. 4. Click the appropriate TCP/IP address and queue, and then click OK. 5. Click Change and scroll through the list of products. 6. Click the correct product, and then click Select. 7. Click Create. Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash. ENWW Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system 327 Installation in Macintosh Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system In-box disk layout The Macintosh printing-system software consists of the following folders: the HP LaserJet InstallerIntegrated installer program for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9, and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders are named as follows: ● Mac OS X ( the HP LaserJet Installer) 328 ● Mac OS 9 (the integrated installer program for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later and for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2) ● PDF (manuals) Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X Classic. Main Install dialog-box sequence This section provides information about the installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option) in Macintosh operating environments. A Custom Installation is not available in Mac OS 9 for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. 1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive. If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder. The hp LaserJet for Macintosh dialog box opens. 2. Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box. If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install Location: to specify a location. 3. Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system. The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file-copy process. The Installation was successful dialog box appears. 4. If you want to perform additional installations, click Continue in the Installation was successful dialog box to return to the HP LaserJet Installer. If you want to set up the printer, click Quit on the Installation was successful dialog box. The Mac OS 9 readme opens. Follow the instructions to continue setting up the printer. ENWW Mac OS X Classic installation 329 Installation in Macintosh Mac OS X Classic installation Mac OS X installation This section provides information about the various installation dialog-box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system. Main Install dialog box sequence This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option). Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive. If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder. Figure 6-8 hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens. Figure 6-9 hp LaserJet Software screen In the hp LaserJet Software pane, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it. In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon. This begins the install process. 330 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Installation in Macintosh Figure 6-10 HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon If you are installing the product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears. Figure 6-11 Authenticate dialog box Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears. Click Cancel to exit the installation. Figure 6-12 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box Click Continue. The License dialog box appears. ENWW Mac OS X installation 331 Figure 6-13 License dialog box Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement. Click Save As… to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk. Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer. Read the software-license agreement and then click Accept to continue the installation. The Easy Install dialog box appears. Figure 6-14 Easy Install dialog box 332 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system. Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install. Click the I icon to the right of each item in the list to open a pop-up screen that describes the component. Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on the Macintosh CD. Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system. Figure 6-16 Installing dialog box The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process. When installation is complete, the LASERJET README.RTF file opens and the LaserJet ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. ENWW Mac OS X installation 333 Installation in Macintosh The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select Custom Install in the same menu. Figure 6-17 LaserJet ReadMe icon A pop-up message stating that the installation was successful also appears. Figure 6-18 Installation success message Click Quit to exit the installer. Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer. 334 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW Engineering Details Engineering Details 7 Introduction This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics: ENWW ● File to E-mail utility ● HP Easy Printer Care ● Media attributes ● Remote firmware update ● Printing print-ready documents ● Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems Introduction 335 File to E-mail utility The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI file to detect where the HP LaserJet product software is installed. The program then attaches relevant log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet product. The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation. HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page. The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL. Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log files and attach them to an e-mail message. The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software CD: ● util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe ● util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message, and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure. NOTE The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending on your product. 336 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Engineering Details Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately. ENWW File to E-mail utility 337 HP Easy Printer Care This section contains information about the following topics: ● Availability ● Uninstall options ● HP Software Update Availability Uninstall options After a printing-system installation, click the uninstall icon in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 program group to select and remove any or all of the HP printing-system components. Follow these instructions to remove the HP Easy Printer Care and HP Device Communications Services in a Windows XP operating environment. NOTE To uninstall the HP Easy Printer Care software only, use the Windows Add/Remove Programs feature. 1. Click Start. 2. Select Hewlett-Packard. 3. Select HP Easy Printer Care. 4. Click Uninstall and follow the onscreen instructions. Whether you uninstall HP Easy Printer Care from the Program menu or by using the Windows Add/ Remove feature, the installer informs you if HP Easy Printer Care is still managing any products. At this point, the following options are available: ● Cancel ● Uninstall ● Continue If you select Continue, then HP Easy Printer Care is uninstalled. The installer then checks to see if the Printer Usage Reports plug-in (PUR) is present and removes it. The uninstall process then removes HP Device Communications Services, if HP Device Communications Services is not supporting programs or products other than HP Easy Printer Care. If HP Device Communications Services is supporting other applications, then its Add/Remove Program entries appear in the Add/Remove Program list. HP Software Update is not uninstalled. HP Software Update HP Software Update, a utility which can check the HP Web site for updates to your HP software, is installed together with HP Easy Printer Care if the system has an older version or does not carry it. To uninstall HP Software Update, use the Windows Add/Remove Programs feature. 338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Media attributes ● Media sources and destinations ● Media-source commands ● Driver-supported media sizes ● Driver-supported media types ● Custom paper sizes ● Media-type commands Engineering Details This section includes the following information about media attributes: Media sources and destinations The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 3800 media sources and destinations Media sources Media destinations 100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1) Standard 250-sheet paper tray (tray 2) Standard 500-sheet paper tray (tray 3) Optional; standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer model Standard 250-sheet top bin Standard Media-source commands The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the command for tray 2. The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command fortray 2. Table 7-2 Media-source commands Media source ENWW PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource1 Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # / ManualFeed true | false or null Manual feed in tray 1 2 2 3 true Tray 1 (100-sheet) 3 4 3 false Tray 2 (250-sheet) 4 1 0 false Media attributes 339 Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued) Media source 1 PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource1 Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # / ManualFeed true | false or null Tray 3 (500-sheet) 5 5 1 false Automatically Select (HP unidrivers) NA NA NA Automatically Select (HP traditional PCL drivers) or Printer Auto Select (HP unidrivers) 7 1 null false For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2" MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2. Driver-supported media sizes The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers. Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes Paper sizes1 Width Height PCL 6 2 Letter 216 mm 279 mm "LETTER" (8.5 inches) (11.0 inches) 215.9 mm 139.7 mm (8.5 inches) (5.5 inches) 197 mm 273 mm (7.75 inches) (10.75 inches) 216 mm 330 mm (8.5 inches) (13 inches) 210 mm 297 mm (8.27 inches) (11.69 inches) 148 mm 210 mm (5.83 inches) (8.27 inches) 182 mm 257 mm (7.17 inches) (10.12 inches) 100 mm 200 mm (3.94 inches) (7.87 inches) 148 mm 200 mm Statement 16K 8.5 x 13 A4 A5 B5 (JIS) Double Postscard (JIS) Double Japan Postscard Rotated "STATEMENT" "ROC16K" "8.5x13" "A4" "A5" "JIS B5" "JPOSTD" “Double Postcard (JIS)” (7.87 inches) 340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued) Paper sizes1 Width Height PCL 6 2 105 mm 241 mm "COM10" (4.13 inches) (9.5 inches) 176 mm 250 mm (6.93 inches) (9.84 inches) 162 mm 229 mm (6.38 inches) (9.02 inches) 110 mm 220 mm (4.33 inches) (8.66 inches) 99 mm 190 mm (3.88 inches) (7.5 inches) 185 mm 266 mm (7.25 inches) (10.5 inches) 216 mm 330 mm (8.5 inches) (12.99 inches) 216 mm 355 mm (8.5 inches) (14.0 inches) Minimum: Minimum: 127 mm 76.2 mm (5.0 inches) (3.0 inches) Maximum: Maximum: 215.9 mm 355.6 mm (8.5 inches) (14.0 inches) (5.83 inches) Envelope B5 Envelope C5 Envelope DL Envelope Monarch Executive Executive (JIS) Legal Custom 1 2 4 "B5 ENV" "C5" Engineering Details Envelope #10 "DL" "MONARCH" "EXEC" "JISEXEC" "LEGAL" 4 For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch. The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String." For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits." Driver-supported media types The following table shows the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-drivers support. Table 7-4 Supported input media types ENWW Media types (command string) Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet) Duplexing unit Manual duplexing Unspecified Y Y Y Y Y Media attributes 341 Table 7-4 Supported input media types (continued) 1 Media types (command string) Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet) Duplexing unit Manual duplexing Plain Y Y Y Y Y Preprinted Y Y Y Y Y Letterhead Y Y Y Y Y Transparency Y Y Y N N Prepunched Y Y Y Y Y Labels Y Y Y N N Bond Y Y Y Y Y Recycled Y Y Y Y Y Color Y Y Y Y Y Light (60–75 g/m2, or 16.4–20.5 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Intermediate (90– 104 g/m2, or 24.7– 28.5 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Heavy (105–120 g/m2, or 28.8–32.9 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Extra Heavy (120–163 g/m2, or 32.9–44.7 lb) Y Y N N Y Cardstock (164–220 g/ m2, or 45–60.3 lb) Y Y N N Y Rough (90–105 g/m2, or 24.7–28.8 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Glossy1 (75–120 g/m2, or 20.5–32.9 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Tough Paper1 (Glossy Film) Y Y Y N Y Envelope Y N N N N Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer. Custom paper sizes The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes 342 Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches) Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Tray Tray 3 (500-sheet) Duplexing unit Dimensions Minimum Maximum Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Media-type commands The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6. Table 7-6 Media-type commands 1 2 ENWW Esc& n# Wd Paper type Esc& 6 Wd Plain Esc& 11 Wd Preprinted Esc& 11 Wd Letterhead Esc& 13 Wd Transparency1 Esc& 11 Wd Prepunched Esc& 7 Wd Labels Esc& 5 Wd Bond Esc& 9 Wd Recycled Esc& 6 Wd Color Esc& 6 Wd Light Esc& 13 Wd Intermediate Esc& 6 Wd Heavy Esc& 12 Wd Extra Heavy Esc& 11 Wd Cardstock2 Esc& 6 Wd Rough Esc& 7 Wd Glossy Esc& 12 Wd Tough Paper Esc& 9 Wd Envelope You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel. The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S". Media attributes 343 Engineering Details Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued) Remote firmware update The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers. The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps: 1. Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the product. 2. Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer. 3. Download the new firmware to the product. Determining the current level of firmware To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press and to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press 3. Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. 4. Press 5. Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0. . to print the configuration page. Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following URL: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file. NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file. Downloading the new firmware to the product For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/ clj3800. The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update. NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts. 344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed. Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed. Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware. Engineering Details Printer messages during the firmware update The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update. Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update Cause Result The job was cancelled from the control panel. No update has occurred. A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed). No update has occurred. A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process. No update has occurred. A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING UPGRADE process. No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port. A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process. The update has been completed. Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update. All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see Table 7-9 Update messages. If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center. The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation. Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure ENWW Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action The .RFU file is corrupted. The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware. The wrong product is contained in the .RFU file. The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ clj3800_firmware. Remote firmware update 345 Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued) Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action The upgrade was interrupted. See Table 7-9 Update messages. A flash hardware failure occurred. Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product for a local telephone support list). Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only if the update process does not succeed. Table 7-9 Update messages Printer message Explanation RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update. NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted. PERFORMING UPGRADE This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware. NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display. INITIALIZING This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the DIMM until the product reinitializes. RESEND UPGRADE This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection (network, parallel, or USB). RFU LOAD ERROR This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted. SEND RFU UPGRADE ON PARALLEL PORT If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product. NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed. Downloading custom color profiles Obtain custom color profiles just as you would any other remote-firmware update, using the procedures described in these sections. Custom color-profile .RFU files are named as follows: 346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW clj####_ _ .RFU where: ● #### is the printer-model number of the color table ● is a one-word description of what the table does ● is a two-part version number consisting of a major and a minor value The custom color-profile .RFU tiles that are available include: A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 4650 printer: Engineering Details ● *clj4650_*.RFU ● A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 9500 printer: *clj9500_*.RFU ● A remote-firmware-update file that resets your printer to its original state: *reset_*.RFU While every care is taken to ensure a close match with the colors available on the product, several factors can affect the outcome of the match: ● Differences between printers within and between a given model line ● Media type ● The age and state of the custom-profile printer and the product to which the profile is to be downloaded ● The use or non-use of genuine HP supplies ● Environmental conditions Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser. NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems. ENWW 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware 2. Open a browser window. 3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp:// , where is the TCP/ IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP:// 192.168.0.90 4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product. 5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window. Remote firmware update 347 NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view. 6. a. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab. b. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites. c. Click OK to save the setting. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 7. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system. Windows operating systems 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display. 348 2. Open a command window on the computer. 3. Type ftp . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90. 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 6. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 7. Type bin at the command prompt. 8. Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 9. Type put , where is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\3800FW.RFU, and then press Enter. NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type the following path: put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800fw.rfu" The following series of messages appears in the command window: Engineering Details 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job 226 Transfer complete After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears. 10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command. 13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface. Macintosh operating systems ENWW 1. Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware. 2. Open a Terminal window on the computer. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder. 3. Type FTP For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter. Remote firmware update 349 6. Type put , where is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/3800fw.rfu, and then press Enter. NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.RFU". To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command. 7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 8. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update through a local Windows port If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system. Windows 98 or Windows Me 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: Mode lpt1:,,p NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command. 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples: > LPT1 Not Rerouted > Resident portion of MODE loaded > Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out 3. At a command prompt, type copy /b , where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and is the name of the appropriate product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1 350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 7. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window. Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer drivers, but it is possible to update the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0. 1. At a command prompt, type copy /b , where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" lpt1 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. ENWW 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Remote firmware update 351 Engineering Details NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, typeC:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" lpt1 Remote firmware update through a USB port If the product is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions: 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b \ \ \ , where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example, type the following: copy /b 3800fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3800 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" \\your_computer\clj3800 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update through a Windows network If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions: 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b \ \ \ , where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer 352 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable, including the following: 1. At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where is the location of the .TAR file. 2. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 3. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the HP Printer Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later. The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software. The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware See Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information. After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process. Complete the following steps: ENWW 1. Open the HP Printer Utility. 2. Select Update Firmware, click Choose, browse to firmware upgrade file, and then click Open. 3. On the Update Firmware screen, click Update. Remote firmware update 353 Engineering Details Remote firmware update for UNIX systems NOTE You might receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline. Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears and the update proceeds as expected. 4. The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 5. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the HP LaserJet Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware See Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information. After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process. Complete the following steps: 354 1. Open the HP LaserJet Utility. 2. Click Select Printer, select the product that you want to update on the network, and then click OK. An information dialog box for the printer appears. 3. On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product. 4. Click Select File. 5. Locate the 3800FW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click Select. The Files dialog boxes are updated to show the 3800FW.RFU file under File to download. 6. Click Download. 7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. A progress bar in the HP LaserJet Utility shows how much of the file has been downloaded. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 8. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command. 1. From a command window, type lpr -P -S -o l -OR- lpr -S -Pbinps , where can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where is the filename of the .RFU file. NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode. 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 5. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site. ENWW 1. Start HP Web Jetadmin. 2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The product Status window opens. 3. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder. Remote firmware update 355 Engineering Details Remote firmware update by using the LPR command 4. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update in the list of products, and click to select it. 5. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list. 6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it. 7. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. 8. Refresh the browser. 9. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu. 10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. 11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message. 12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations. Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations. 1. Start HP Web Jetadmin. 2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices. -orb. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK. -orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK. 356 3. To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open. 4. The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it. 5. In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information. Click Return to Device Group when finished. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Printing print-ready documents ● HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL) ● Portable Document Format (.PDF) ● Postscript (.PS) ● Text (.TXT) Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product. NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready file type can be substituted. Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser. NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems. 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware. 2. Open a browser window. 3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp:// . For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following: FTP:// 192.168.0.90 4. Locate the print-ready file for the product. 5. Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window. NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view. 1. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab. 2. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites. 3. Click OK to save the setting. Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system: ENWW Printing print-ready documents 357 Engineering Details Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer without first opening the original software program: Windows operating systems 1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware. 2. Open a command window on the computer. 3. Type ftp . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: ftp 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 6. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 7. Type bin at the command prompt. 8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 9. Type put , where is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type the following: put C:\LJ\3800FW.PDF NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800FW.PDF" The following series of messages appears in the command window: 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job 10. Press Enter on the keyboard. 11. The print-ready file prints. 12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command. 13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface. 358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Macintosh operating systems 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware. 2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the following folder: 3. Type FTP . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: FTP 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter. 6. You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/ Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put , where is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following: put /username/desktop/3800FW.PDF NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.PDF" To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type put and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command. 7. Press Enter. 8. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer. 9. The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update. Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating system. ENWW Printing print-ready documents 359 Engineering Details System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal Windows 98 or Windows Me 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: Mode lpt1:,,p NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command. 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples: > LPT1 Not Rerouted > Resident portion of MODE loaded > Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out 3. At a command prompt, type copy /b , where is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the following: copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF" 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. 5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window. 1. At a command prompt, type copy /b , where is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents \3800FW.PDF". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. 3. 360 At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Print-ready file printing in a Windows network If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps. 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b \ \ \ , where is the name of the print-ready file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example, type the following: NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF" \\your_server\sharename 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following: At the command prompt, type cp , where is the location of the print-ready file. Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command. 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware. 2. From a command window, type the following: lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S -Pbinps where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file. NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode. ENWW 3. The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window. 4. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Printing print-ready documents 361 Engineering Details C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for operating system that supports the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and PS Emulation Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver. For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers, see HP traditional print drivers for Windows. For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers, see HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows. NOTE HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit ) operating systems. HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, except as otherwise noted. Job-stream output Table 7-10 Driver support for the job-stream output feature Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL6 PCL 6 Postscript PCL 5 support PCL 5 PS Emulation x PS Emulation x PCL 6 support x x PCL 6 pass-through support x x PCL 6 XL Color x x Postscript 3 PCL 5 x x Postscript 1, 2 x x PCL 6 raster compression Table 7-11 PCL 6 color raster compression support Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL6 PCL 6 Postscript PCL 6 color raster compression x 362 Chapter 7 PCL 5 Engineering Details PS Emulation PCL 5 PS Emulation x ENWW PJL/PJL Encoding Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript PJL support x x x x x x UTF-8 encoding for PJL (Unicode to 8-bit) x x x x x x Engineering Details Table 7-12 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding Job tracking Table 7-13 Driver support for job tracking Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript .PRN file driver identification x x x x x Job accounting information x x x x x Job accounting enhancements (UUID) x x x x x Job accounting enhancements (color) x x x Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x x x x Job Timestamp – born on date (PJL TIMESTAMP) x x x x x Born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x x x x Sending user name with every job x x x x x Driver hooks for job ticket consumption x x x Driver hooks for event extensions for UI control data x x x ENWW PS Emulation x x (Mac OS X only) Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 363 Connectivity/Printing Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Parallel (direct connect) x x x x x x Network – TCP/IP (wired) x x x x x x x Network – TCP/IP (wireless x x x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB Print) (bidirectional) x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 / 7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through x 1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 / 7.1.3) (bidirectional) – Windows XP only x x USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 (Apple USB Print) (bidirectional) x USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x (Mac OS 9 only) USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x (Mac OS X only) Rendezvous x (Mac OS X only) Bidirectional communication Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Autoconfiguration through EAC x x x x x Autoconfiguration through direct connect – parallel - LPT - DOT4 stack x x x x x Network – TCP/IP x x x x x 364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details PS Emulation ENWW Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features (continued) Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 Postscript PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 5 PS Emulation Autoconfiguration through EAC over USB (DOT4) x x x x x Update Now x x x x x x x Language Monitor1 1 MasterMon is a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication products. It inserts PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports. HP Driver Preconfiguration Table 7-16 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x Feature lockout x x x x x Continuous export x x x x x PS Emulation Bundle support Table 7-17 Bundle support Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation Printer bundle in driver UI Bundle support thorugh installer ENWW x x x PS Emulation Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 365 Engineering Details x Automatic Configuration (other than EAC) Tray and paper assignment Table 7-18 Tray and paper assignment Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 and Windows Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 Postscript Assign paper size to tray x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation x Installable options Table 7-19 Driver support for installable options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Duplexing unit x x x x x x x Manual duplex enable x x x x x Printer hard disk x x x x x x x Total memory x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DWS (available memory) Additional source trays x x Font DIMM/compact flash support x x x Font DIMM Installer x x Mopier enabled x x x x x x x Job-storage feature enabled x x x x x x x Postscript passthrough 366 Chapter 7 x Engineering Details x ENWW Printer services Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 Postscript Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site x x x x Launch HP EWS features through TCP/IP port x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation Engineering Details Table 7-20 Printer services (Services tab) UI features Table 7-21 Driver support for UI features Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x x x x x x x (Mac OS X only) UI extensions x x x Page preview images x x x x x x Printer image bitmaps with hot spots x x Paper size dimensions x x x x Device settings notification x x x x x About … x x x x x x Accessibility/Disability (JAWS) x x x x x x (Mac OS X only) Accessibility architecture x x x x x Help features Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript What's this? Help (F1) x x x x x x ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 367 Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features (continued) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Help button x x x x x x x Bubble Help PS Emulation MS Windows "?" Help x x x x x x Constraint Help x x x x x x Print Task Quick Sets Table 7-23 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Print Task Quick Sets x x x x x User Defined Quick Sets x x x x x PS Emulation x Media sizes Table 7-24 Driver support for media sizes Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Media Size selection x x x x x x x User-defined custom media x x x x x x x Custom media-size dialog through driver UI x x x x x x x 368 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Media types Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Media types appear in one list x x x x x x x User Defined Media Types x x x x x Combined Media Types & Sources in program. (Always ON, NO driver UI switch) x x x x Combined Media Types and sources in program (optional, driver UI switch) x x Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI) Alternative Letterhead mode x x x Engineering Details Table 7-25 Driver support for media types x x x x Job storage Table 7-26 Driver support for the job-storage features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Proof and hold x x x x x x x Private job x x x x x x x Quick Copy x x x x x x x Stored Job x x x x x x x Job name x x x x x User name x x x x x x x PIN to print (for private jobs) x x x x x x x PIN to print (for stored jobs) x x x x x Job-storage pop-up x x x x Automatic job and user name x x x x x Job-storage override x x x x x ENWW x x x x x Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 369 Print quality and resolution Table 7-27 Print-quality and resolution features Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Print-quality options x x x x x x x x x Print-quality – custom options recall Print optimizations x x Rendering mode (automatic) x Send graphics as vector x x Send graphics as raster x x Send page as raster x Color REt1 x x x Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) Image Mode x HP Digital Photograph x x PCL 5 Immediate Graphics Mode 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x Activated through the Edge Control option Reordering Options Table 7-28 Driver support for the reordering options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Page order (based on output bin) x x x x x Page order (reordering for job) x x x 370 Chapter 7 Engineering Details PS Emulation x (Mac OS X only) x (Mac OS X only) ENWW Resizing options Table 7-29 Resizing options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Print Document On x x x x x Scale to Fit x x x x x Allow Scaling from Large Paper x x x x x % of Normal Size x x x x x Rotate by 180 degrees x x x x x PS Emulation Engineering Details x x x x Color settings Table 7-30 Color settings Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Mac Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Mac Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Color Options x x x x x x x Manual/automatic color options x x x x x x CMYK inks x x x Print in Grayscale x x x x x x x Color/monochrome switching x x x x x x x ICM Method x x x ICM Intent x x x Print in Grayscale blocked (HP PCL 6 Unidriver [Black] only) x sRGB (ColorSmart for legacy HP LaserJet printers) x x x x x CMYK color management ENWW x Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 371 Watermarks Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature 1 Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh11 Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Watermarks on/off x x x x x x x First page only x x x x x x x Custom watermark definition x x x x x x x Watermark angle x x x x x x x Watermark font name x x x x x x x Watermark font color x x x x x x x Watermark font shading x x x x x x x Watermark font size x x x x x x x Watermark font style x x x x x x x Locally defined watermarks x x x x x Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic) only; not supported by Mac OS X or later. Alternative source/paper type Table 7-32 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript All pages the same x x x x x x x Use different paper (UI control) x x x x x Front Cover (Blank Front Cover Inserted) x x x x x First Page x x x x x x Other pages x x x x x x Last Page x x x x x Back Cover – Blank Back Cover Inserted x x x x x 372 Chapter 7 Engineering Details x ENWW Printing destination Table 7-33 Driver support for the printing-destination feature Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Paper Destinations x x x x x PS Emulation Engineering Details x Finishing options and duplexing Table 7-34 Duplexing Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Auto duplex/print on both sides x x x x x x x Manual duplex x x x x x Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x x x x x Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x x x x x x x Pages per sheet (N-up) x x x x x x x Page borders on/off x x x x x x Page order (N-Up) x x x x x x Booklet Printing (layout through software) x x x x x x (Mac OS X only) Booklet Target Size x x x x x x Other document options Table 7-35 Other document options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Orientation (portrait/landscape) x x x x x x x Number of copies x x x x x x x ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 373 Table 7-35 Other document options (continued) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript x x x x x x x x x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation Ignore application collation Collate x x x Collate – feature in driver UI Collate through mopy x x x Advanced printing features x x x Mirror image/mirror output x x x Font support Table 7-36 Font support Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript x x x x x x x PCL 5 General device font support Font substitution x x Font DIMM (on/off) x x x x Send TrueType as Bitmap x x x x TrueType Fonts (UI option) Print Text as Black x x x x x x x x Postscript-specific features Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features Operating system Windows XP Windows 98, Me HP unidriver Postscript Driver PS Emulation Unidriver PS Emulation Driver Postscript memory x x Output protocol x x Send CTRL-D before each job x x Send CTRL-D after each job x x 374 Chapter 7 Engineering Details Macintosh Postscript ENWW Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued) Windows XP Windows 98, Me HP unidriver Macintosh Postscript Driver PS Emulation Unidriver PS Emulation Driver Convert gray text to postscript gray x Convert gray graphics to postscript gray x Add euro currency symbol x Job timeout x x Wait timeout x x Minimum font size to download as outline x Minimum font size to download as bitmap x Postscript Engineering Details Operating system Printing Preferences CMYK Inks x x Postscript Language Level x x Send postscript error handler x x Fit to Page x x Output options Optimize for speed x x Optimize for portability x x Encapsulated postscript (EPS) x x Archive format x x Fit to Page x x Automatic x x Outline x x Bitmap x x Native TrueType x x TrueType font download option ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 375 376 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics % of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 118 unidrivers 227 A About button PCL traditional drivers 148 PS Emulation Driver 170 About tab, unidrivers 266 accessibility documentation 19 drivers 367 accessories, automatic configuration 31 ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) compliance 19 Add Printer installation 297 Additional Drivers dialog box, Windows 294 Additional Software dialog box, Customization Wizard 306 Additional Software dialog box, Windows 290 Adobe Acrobat Reader installing 26 printing PDF files without 357 viewing documentation 18 Adobe RGB PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 182 unidrivers 252 Adobe Web site 166 Advanced Printing Features setting, unidrivers 203, 204 Advanced tab, unidrivers 201 alerts, e-mail HP Embedded Web Server 65, 66 Macintosh 86 ENWW Allow Scaling from Large Paper, PCL traditional drivers 163 Alternative Letterhead Mode PCL traditional drivers 163 unidrivers 205 alternative source support 372 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance 19 AppleTalk networks 317 application settings traditional drivers 95 unidrivers 195 ASCII output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 260 autoconfiguration, driver PCL traditional drivers 164 support for 31 unidrivers 262 autoconfiguration, Enterprise about 31 Windows support 32 Automatic color settings PCL traditional drivers 151 unidrivers 249 automatic two-sided printing PS Emulation Driver 170 autorun CD-ROM, Windows 25 B Back button, Windows installation dialog boxes 275 Back Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 132, 135 unidrivers 217, 222 Back to Front printing, unidrivers 206 Basic Installation choosing 25 dialog boxes, Windows 276 Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers 146 bidirectional communication about 31 driver support 364 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 31 binary output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 260 binding settings PCL traditional drivers 108 unidrivers 236 bins custom paper sizes 129, 214 driver support 366 black, printing all text as PCL traditional drivers 113, 115 unidrivers 205 booklet printing settings PCL traditional drivers 109 unidrivers 236 both sides, printing on PCL traditional driver settings 106 PS Emulation Driver 170 unidrivers 233 Bubble help 100 bundle support 365 C Cancel button, Windows installation dialog boxes 275 cardstock, paper type commands 343 CD-ROM directory structure, Macintosh 12 directory structure, Windows 11 Index 377 documentation 18, 26 installer, Windows printingsystem software 24 installing Macintosh printingsystem software 316 installing Windows printingsystem software 274 languages 12 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box, Windows 288 Check Printer Connection dialog box, Windows 285 CHM files, viewing 19 CMYK settings, PS Emulation Driver 183 collation settings PCL traditional drivers 160, 163 PS Emulation Driver 181 unidrivers 202, 264 Color Control, PS Emulation Driver 172 Color Options, PS Emulation Driver 182 color printing driver support 371 ICC profiles 40 Image Color Management (ICM) 203 PANTONE color profiles 41 restricting from control panel 38 restricting from HP Embedded Web Server 69 restricting from Macintosh 90 settings, controlling 38 Color tab PCL traditional drivers 150 unidrivers 248 Color Themes PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 182 unidrivers 251 Color Usage log, Macintosh 83 command-line printing, Windows 357 command-line silent install for Windows 311 commands, paper size 341 378 Index source 339 type 343 common installer, features 26 Configuration Page, HP Embedded Web Server 62 Configure Device page, HP Embedded Web Server 65 Configure tab, PCL traditional drivers 157 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box, Windows 284 Confirm Network Settings dialog box, Windows 283 connectivity bidirectional communication support 31 driver support 364 features 6 Printer Connection dialog box, Windows 278 Searching dialog box, Windows 279 constraint messages PCL traditional drivers 99 unidrivers 199 context-sensitive help PCL traditional drivers 99 PS Emulation Driver 166 unidrivers 199 continuous export 36 control panel settings traditional drivers 95 unidrivers 195 Copy Count settings PCL traditional drivers 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 202, 264 covers, use different paper settings PCL traditional drivers 132 unidrivers 217 Ctrl-D settings 193, 261 Custom Installation choosing 25 dialog boxes, Windows 276 Custom Installer Location dialog box, Windows Customization Wizard 307 custom paper sizes PCL traditional drivers 126, 342 PCL unidrivers 213, 342 customer support 61 Customization Wizard dialog boxes 298 D default Print Task Quick Sets PCL traditional drivers 102 unidrivers 208 default printer, setting 312 deleting job-storage jobs 145 destinations, paper 339 Device Information page, HP Embedded Web Server 60, 65 Device Installer Customization Wizard dialog boxes 298 Device Options tab, PS Emulation Driver 176 Device Settings tab, unidrivers 256 Device Status page, HP Embedded Web Server 61 diagnostics 37, 254 dialog boxes, printing-system software installation Mac OS X 330 Mac OS X Classic 329 Windows 276 Windows Customization Wizard 298 Digital Imaging Options, unidrivers 223 DIMMs, fonts PCL traditional driver settings 162 unidriver settings 258 direct printing FTP, Windows 357 local port, Windows 359 LPR 361 networks, Windows 361 UNIX 361 direct-connect installation 276 directory structure, software CDROM Macintosh 12 Windows 11 disabling driver features 35 ENWW disk. See hard disk disk space requirements Macintosh and Linux 7 Windows 7 Document Options PCL traditional drivers 105 unidrivers 203, 233 document preview image PCL traditional drivers 112, 118, 136, 148, 156 unidrivers 223, 227, 238, 253 documentation Help feature support 367 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide 20 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 21 install notes 20 localized versions 13 Print Task Quick Set for use guide, HP Traditional PCL traditional drivers 105 Print Task Quick Set for use guide, unidriver 211 User Guide 19 viewing 18, 26 double-sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 106 PS Emulation Driver 170 unidriver settings 233 downloading firmware 344 printing-system software 9 Driver Work Space (DWS) 163 drivers accessibility support 367 accessory configuration 31 Add Printer installation 297 availability by operating system 10 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 bundle support 365 color options 371 connectivity support 364 continuous export feature 36 destination support 373 diagnostics 37 ENWW Enterprise AutoConfiguration 31 finishing options 373 font support 374 Help feature support 367 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36, 365 included 27 installable options support 366 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 job-storage support 369 Linux operating systems 8 lockable features 35, 84 Macintosh 30 media supported 339 network preconfiguration 34 paper source commands 339 paper supported 368 PCL 6 color raster compression support 362 PJL encoding 363, 372 Point and Print installation 311 Postcript-specific features 374 Print Quality options 112 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 PS Emulation Driver features 165 quality settings 370 reordering options 370 resizing options support 371 Services support 367 settings 95, 195 standalone 8 tray assignment 366 UNIX operating systems 9 user interface support 367 watermarks support 372 Drivers dialog box, Customization Wizard 304 Drivers dialog box, Windows 289 duplexing unit custom paper sizes 129, 214 media supported 341 models including 5 PCL traditional driver settings 106, 159 print modes 107 PS Emulation Driver settings 170, 188 unidriver configuration 263 unidriver settings 233 DWS (Driver Work Space) 163 E e-mail alerts HP Embedded Web Server 65, 66 Macintosh 86 E-mail Server page, HP Embedded Web Server 65 Easy Printer Care about 42 accessing 43 availiability 338 Find Other Printers 44 Maintenance Tools pane 55 My HP Printers screen 49 Printer Usage Report 56 Support tab 53 Troubleshooting Tools pane 58 uninstallation 338 Update screen 57 Edge Control settings PCL traditional drivers 152 PS Emulation Driver 183 unidrivers 250 Edit Other Links page, HP Embedded Web Server 65 Effects tab PCL traditional drivers 116 unidrivers 225 Embedded Jetdirect page, printing 59 embedded Web server. See HP Embedded Web Server Energy Star compliance 5 Enterprise AutoConfiguration about 31 Novell NetWare operating systems supported 33 Windows operating systems supported 32 envelopes, paper type commands 343 escape sequences Index 379 paper source 339 paper type 343 event log 60 EWS. See HP Embedded Web Server exporting driver parameters 36 External Fonts settings, PCL unidrivers 258 F features 4 File to E-mail utility 336 File Upload, Macintosh 81 Find Other Printers, HP Easy Printer Care 44 Finish dialog box, Customization Wizard 310 Finish dialog box, Windows 295 finishing options 373 Finishing tab PCL traditional drivers 101 unidrivers 232 Firewall Detected dialog box, Windows 280 firewalls dialog box, Windows 280 firmware determining current level 344 downloading 344 FTP updates, Windows 348 HP Web Jetadmin updates 355 LPR command updates 355 Macintosh updates 82, 349, 353 messages during update 345 troubleshooting updates 345 UNIX updates 353 updating remotely 344 verifying installation 346 Windows network updates 352 Windows, local port update 350 first page out 4 First Page paper settings PCL traditional drivers 133 unidrivers 218 Fit to Page settings PCL Traditional Drivers 117 380 Index PS Emulation Driver 182 Flip Pages Up PCL traditional drivers 108 unidriver settings 236 Font Substitution Table, PS Emulation Unidriver 257 fonts DIMM settings, PCL traditional drivers 162 DIMM settings, unidrivers 258 driver support 374 External, PCL unidrivers 258 features 5 Macintosh 315 PS 3 emulation 165 PS Emulation Driver settings 174 PS Emulation Unidriver 262 Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL traditional drivers 113, 114 Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers 205 substitution table, PS Emulation Driver 174 substitution table, unidrivers 258 TrueType download option 375 unidriver settings 203 Upload Fonts, HP Printer Utility 80 watermarks 121 Windows 268, 270 Form to Tray Assignment, unidrivers 257 Front Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 132 unidrivers 217 FTP direct printing, Windows 357 Windows firmware updates 348 Full Installation choosing 25 dialog boxes, Windows 276 G Graphic settings PCL traditional drivers 113, 114 unidrivers 203 Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver 171 grayscale printing PCL traditional drivers 153 PS Emulation Driver 181 guides. See documentation H Halftone settings PCL traditional drivers 153 PS Emulation Driver 173, 183 unidrivers 251 hard disk features 4 models including 4 printer 263 PS Emulation Driver settings 189 unidriver settings 263 heavy paper, paper type commands 343 help Bubble 100 Macintosh 314 operating systems supported 367 PCL traditional drivers 99 PS Emulation Driver 166 unidrivers 199 Help button, Windows installation dialog boxes 275 HP Device Installer Customization Wizard dialog boxes 298 HP Digital Imaging Options, unidrivers 223 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 37 HP Driver Preconfiguration driver support 365 operating systems and drivers supported 36 status, PCL traditional drivers 149 HP Easy Printer Care about 42 accessing 43 availiability 338 Find Other Printers 44 ENWW Maintenance Tools pane 55 My HP Printers screen 49 Printer Usage Report 56 Support tab 53 Troubleshooting Tools pane 58 uninstallation 338 Update screen 57 HP Embedded Web Server about 59 alerts page 65 AutoSend page 65 Configuration Page 62 Configure Device page 65 Device Information page 60, 65 Device Status page 61 documentation 20 E-mail Server page 65 HP Printer Utility, accessing from 93 HP Web Jetadmin 59 Information tab 60 language, setting 65 links 61, 65 Macintosh support 314 navigation 60 Networking tab 70 Security page 65, 68 Settings tab 64 time settings 65 user guide 59 HP Instant Support 61 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 21 HP Jetdirect page, printing 59 HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh firmware updates 354 HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) 31 HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers HP Printer Utility, Macintosh about 73 accessing 73 Color Usage log 83 Device Information 78 E-mail Alerts 86 ENWW Embedded Web Server access 93 File Upload 81 HP Support 79 Lock Resources 84 Network Settings 87 Rendezvous Setting 88 Restrict Color 90 Supplies Management 89 Supplies Status 76 Tray Configuration 84 Update Firmware 82 Upload Fonts 80 HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See PS Emulation Unidriver HP Registration dialog box, Windows 297 HP Software License Agreement dialog box, Windows 278 HP Toolbox, not supported 23 HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver. See PS Emulation Driver HP Web Jetadmin downloading 26, 94 Driver Preconfiguration Plugin 34 firmware updates 355 HP Embedded Web Server 59 HPNRA (HP Network Registry Agent) 31 HPPJL Encoding 179 HTML files, viewing 19 I ICC color profiles 40 Ignore Application Collation, PCL traditional drivers 160, 163 Image Color Management (ICM) 203 inches, settings 130 Include types in application source list option in drivers 164 Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages Information tab, HP Embedded Web Server 60 input trays. See trays install notes 20 Installable Options PS Emulation Driver 188 PS Emulation Unidriver 262 installation Add Printer 297 Adobe Acrobat Reader 26 command-line silent 311 Customization Wizard for Windows 298 dialog boxes, Mac OS X 330 dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic 329 File to E-mail utility 336 Macintosh printing-system software 316 Point and Print 311 pre-existing, modifying 276 system requirements for Macintosh and Linux operating systems 7 system requirements for Windows operating systems 7 Windows printing-system software 274 Installation Type dialog box, Windows 288 installers availability by operating system 10 common, features 26 customizing 298 localized versions 13 Windows 24 Installing dialog box, Customization Wizard 310 Installing dialog box, Windows 294 Instant Support 61 International Color Consortium profiles viewing 40 IP address, locating 59 J Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 21 Job Notification Options Index 381 PCL traditional drivers 143 Job storage enabling in PCL traditional drivers 161 Macintosh 85 operating systems supported 369 PCL traditional drivers 138 PS Emulation Driver 179, 189 unidriver settings 240, 263 job stream output support 362 Job Timeout settings 191, 261 job tracking 363 L landscape orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 108, 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 236, 238 Language Selection dialog box, Customization Wizard 299, 300 Language Selection dialog box, Windows 276 languages CD-ROMs 12 HP Embedded Web Server 65 Language Selection dialog box, Windows 276 large paper, allowing scaling 163 Last Page settings PCL traditional drivers 134 unidrivers 220 Layout Options, unidrivers 206 letterhead, alternative mode PCL traditional drivers 163 unidrivers 205 license agreement dialog box, Windows 278 links HP Embedded Web Server 61, 65 Linux operating systems driver availability 8 system requirements 7 local port command line printing, Windows 359 localized CD-ROMs 12 lockable features, drivers 35, 84 382 Index LPR commands firmware updates 355 printing PDF files 361 M Macintosh operating systems availability of software components 10 Classic support 30 Color Usage log 83 components, software 314 Device Information 78 dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic printing-system software installation 329 dialog boxes, Mac OS X printingsystem software installation 330 direct printing 357 directory structure, software CDROM 12 driver versions 30 e-mail alerts 86 File Upload command 81 firmware upgrades 349, 353 fonts supported 315 HP Embedded Web Server 314 HP Printer Utility 73 install notes 314 installers 10 installing printing-system software 316 locking driver features 84 network settings 87 network setup 316, 326 online help 314 PDEs 314 PPDs 314 Rendezvous Setting 88 Restrict Color 90 setting up products with Mac OS X 325 stored jobs 85 Supplies Management 89 supplies status 76 supported 8 system requirements 7 tray configuration 84 uninstalling printing-system software 327 Update Firmware 82 Upload Fonts 80 Maintenance Tools pane, HP Easy Printer Care 55 Manual color settings PCL traditional drivers 151 unidrivers 249 manuals. See documentation margins PCL 6 driver 341 PS Emulation Driver 169 measurement units 130 media. See paper memory base 4 installation requirements for Macintosh and Linux operating systems 7 installation requirements for Windows operating systems 7 PCL traditional driver settings 163 PS Emulation Driver settings 178 PS Emulation Unidriver settings 260 unidriver settings 263 messages, constraint PCL traditional drivers 99 unidrivers 199 Microsoft Point and Print installation 311 millimeters, settings 130 mirror image, PS Emulation Driver 173 model scripts, UNIX 9 models features 4 PCL traditional driver settings 158 moire effect, handling 113, 115 Mopier settings PCL traditional drivers 160 PS Emulation Driver 189 unidriver 263 More Configuration Options, PCL traditional drivers 161 ENWW My HP Printers screen, HP Easy Printer Care 49 N negative image, PS Emulation Driver 173 Networking tab, HP Embedded Web Server 70 networks bidirectional communication support 364 color printing, restricting 38 direct printing 361 Embedded Jetdirect page, printing 59 firewalls 280 firmware updates 352 HP Driver Preconfiguration 34 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 21 HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 94 Macintosh settings 87 Macintosh setup 316, 317, 326 Point and Print installation 311 settings 72 TCP/IP Settings, Windows installation dialog box 288 Windows printing-system software installation 274 Neutral Grays settings PCL traditional drivers 153 PS Emulation Driver 183 unidrivers 251 Next steps dialog box, Windows 295 Novell NetWare operating systems, Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 33 number of copies, setting PCL traditional drivers 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 202, 264 O online help. See help operating systems ENWW availability of software components 10 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 32 Help feature support 367 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 365 PCL 6 color raster compression support 362 Postscript feature support 374 Services tab support 367 standalone drivers 8 supported 8 user interface support 367 Optimizations option, PCL unidrivers 204 Optional Paper Sources, PCL traditional drivers 160 ordering supplies 26, 51 orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 108, 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 236, 238 Other Pages paper settings PCL traditional drivers 134 unidrivers 220 output bins. See bins Output Protocol settings, PS Emulation Unidriver 260 Output Settings, PCL traditional drivers 113, 115 P Page Order settings PCL traditional drivers 111 unidrivers 206, 237 page orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 108, 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 236, 238 Page Setup tab, PS Emulation Driver 166 pages per minute 4 Pages per Sheet settings PCL traditional drivers 110 unidrivers 237 PANTONE color profiles 41 paper Allow Scaling from Large 163 Alternative Letterhead Mode 163, 205 custom sizes, PCL driver support 342 custom sizes, PCL traditional driver settings 126 custom sizes, PCL unidriver settings 213 driver support 368 Include types in application source list setting 164 margins 341 Pages per Sheet settings, PCL traditional drivers 110 Pages per Sheet settings, unidrivers 237 Print Document On settings, PCL traditional drivers 117 Print Document On settings, unidrivers 226 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 233 Print on Both Sides, PCL traditional drivers 106 PS Emulation Driver settings 167 size commands 341 Size is settings, PCL traditional drivers 125 Size is settings, unidrivers 213 sizes supported 5 source commands 339 Source is settings, PCL traditional drivers 130 Source is settings, unidrivers 215 sources and destinations 339 type commands 343 Type is: settings, PCL traditional drivers 131 Type is: settings, unidrivers 216 types and sizes supported 339 types supported 341 Index 383 Paper Handling Options, PCL traditional drivers 159 Paper Options PCL traditional drivers 125 unidrivers 212 Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers 124 Paper/Output settings, unidrivers 202 Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 207 parallel port direct-connect installation 276 PCL 6 raster compression support 362 PCL documents, printing 60 PCL files, command-line printing 357 PCL traditional drivers About button 148 accessing 97 Allow Scaling from Large Paper 163 Alternative Letterhead Mode 163 alternative source support 372 Basics tab 146 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 Booklet Printing 109 bundle support 365 Color tab 150 Color Themes box 154 Configuration Status 149 Configure tab 157 connectivity support 364 custom paper sizes 342 destination support 373 Document Options 105 document preview image 112, 118, 136, 148, 156 duplexing unit settings 159 Effects tab 116 finishing options 373 Finishing tab 101 Fit to Page settings 117 font support 374 Graphic settings 113, 114 grayscale printing 153 384 Index Help feature support 367 Help system 99 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36 Ignore Application Collation 163 Include types in application source list setting 164 included 27 installable options support 366 Job Storage, enabling 161 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 Job-storage settings 138 job-storage support 369 localized versions 13 margins 341 media supported 339 memory settings 163 Mopier Enabled settings 160 More Configuration Options 161 operating systems supported 10 Optional Paper Sources 160 Output Settings 113, 115 Paper Handling Options 159 Paper Options 125 paper size commands 341 paper source commands 339 paper supported 368 Paper tab 124 paper type commands 343 PCL 6 color raster compression support 362 PJL encoding 363 preconfiguration support 365 Print Quality Details settings 112, 113 Print Quality group box 112 Print Task Quick Sets 102 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 Printer Model box 158 product image 136 quality settings 370 reordering options 370 resizing options support 371 RGB Color settings 154 Scale to Fit 117 Services tab 367 tray assignment 366 Update Now button 164 user interface support 367 Watermarks settings 119 watermarks support 372 PCL unidrivers % of Normal Size 227 About tab 266 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 203 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 205 alternative source support 372 Automatic Configuration 262 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 booklets 236 bundle support 365 Color tab 248 Color Themes 251 connectivity support 364 Copy Count settings 202 custom paper sizes 342 destination support 373 Device Settings tab 256 Document Options 203, 233 document preview image 223, 227, 238, 253 duplexing 233 Edge Control 250 Effects tab 225 External Fonts settings 258 features 195 finishing options 373 Finishing tab 232 Flip Pages Up 236 Font DIMM Installer 258 Font Substitution Table 258 font support 374 Form to Tray Assignment 257 Graphic setting 203 Halftone settings 251 Help feature support 367 Help system 199 ENWW HP Digital Imaging Options 223 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36 Image Color Management (ICM) 203 included 27 Installable Options settings 262 installable options support 366 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 Job-storage settings 240 job-storage support 369 Layout Options 206 localized versions 13 media supported 339 Mopier settings 263 Neutral Grays 251 operating systems supported 10 Pages per Sheet 237 Paper Options 212 paper size commands 341 paper supported 368 paper type commands 343 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PCL 6 color raster compression support 362 PJL encoding 363 preconfiguration support 365 Print Optimizations option 204 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tab 197 Properties tab 198 quality settings 370 raster compression 206 reordering options 370 Resizing Options settings 226 resizing options support 371 Scale to Fit 226 Services tab 254, 367 tray assignment 366 TrueType font settings 203 user interface support 367 ENWW Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 372 PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions) 314 PDF files command-line printing 357 installing Adobe Acrobat Reader 26 LPR commands, printing 361 Macintosh, File Upload command 81 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 60 viewing 19 Percentage of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 118 unidrivers 227 PINs, private jobs PCL traditional drivers 143 PS Emulation Driver 180 unidrivers 244, 245 PJL encoding 363 Point and Print installation, Windows printing-system software 311 Port Creation Options dialog box, Customization Wizard 304 port selection dialog box, Windows Customization Wizard 301 portrait orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 108, 147 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 236, 238 ports, included 6 PostScript Device settings, PS Emulation Unidriver 260 postscript documents, printing 60 PostScript Options, unidrivers 204 PostScript Passthrough 264 Postscript printer description (PPD) files 314 PostScript tab Advanced button 192 bitmap compression 192 Ctrl-D settings 193 data format 193 error information 191 header 191 language level 192 output format 191 PS Emulation Driver 189 timeout value 191 PPD (postscript printer description) files 314 pre-existing installation, modifying 276 preconfiguration, driver 34 preview image, document PCL traditional drivers 112, 118, 136, 148, 156 unidrivers 238, 253 Print All Text as Black PCL traditional drivers 113, 115 unidrivers 205 Print Document On settings PCL traditional drivers 117 unidrivers 226 print modes 107 Print on Both Sides PCL traditional driver settings 106 PS Emulation Driver 170 unidriver settings 233 Print Optimizations option, PCL unidrivers 204 Print Page Borders settings PCL traditional drivers 111 unidrivers 237 Print Quality Details, PCL traditional drivers 112, 113 Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers about 102 defaults 102 use guide 105 Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers about 208 custom 212 defaults 208 use guide 211 print-ready files command-line printing 357 printing by FTP 357 printing by local WIndows port 359 printing by Windows network 361 Index 385 printing in UNIX systems 361 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 60 printing with LPR command 361 Printer Connection dialog box, Full Installation 278 printer control panel settings traditional drivers 95 unidrivers 195 Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) 314 Printer Driver Test Page dialog box, Windows 296 Printer Features, unidrivers 205 Printer Found dialog box, Windows 282, 283 Printer Model features 4 PCL traditional driver settings 158 Printer Not Found dialog box, Windows 281 Printer Port dialog box, Customization Wizard 301 Printer Properties dialog box, Customization Wizard 308 Printer Properties dialog box, Windows 292 Printer Settings dialog box, Windows 286 printer, setting default 312 printing direct in a Windows network 361 direct in UNIX 361 direct using FTP 357 direct using local Windows port 359 direct using LPR command 361 files using HP Embedded Web Server 60 User Guide 19 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Private job settings PCL traditional drivers 141 PS Emulation Driver 180 unidrivers 244 PRN files, printing 60 386 Index product image 136 product support 61 Proof and Hold job settings PCL traditional drivers 141 PS Emulation Driver 180 unidrivers 243 Properties tabs 198 protocols configuring 72 PS Emulation Unidriver 260 Windows installation dialog box 288 PS 3 font emulation 165 PS Emulation Driver About 170 alternative source support 372 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 bundle support 365 collation settings 181 Color Control 172 Color Options 182 connectivity support 364 context-sensitive help 166 copies, number of 169 destination support 373 Device Options tab 176 Edge Control 183 features 165, 374 finishing options 373 Fit to Page 182 font support 374 Fonts tab 174 Graphics tab 171 grayscale printing 181 halftone settings 173, 183 Help feature support 367 Help system 166 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36 HPPJL Encoding 179 included 27 Installable Options 188 installable options support 366 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 job-storage settings 179, 189 job-storage support 369 localized versions 13 media supported 339 memory settings 178 mirror image, printing 173 Mopier Mode 189 More Options 170 negative image, printing 173 Neutral Grays 183 operating systems supported 10 Page Setup tab 166 paper supported 368 PJL encoding 363 PostScript tab 189 preconfiguration support 365 Print Quality group box 112 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 Printer features group box 178 Printing on Both Sides 170 PS 3 font emulation 165 quality settings 370 reordering options 370 resizing options support 371 resolution settings 172 Scaling control 173 Services tab 367 tray assignment 366 tray settings 169 Unprintable Area 169 user interface support 367 Watermark settings 185 Watermarks settings 184 watermarks support 372 Window duplexing unit settings 188 PS emulation fonts 270 PS Emulation Unidriver % of Normal Size 227 About tab 266 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 203 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 205 alternative source support 372 ENWW Automatic Configuration 262 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 booklets 236 bundle support 365 Color tab 248 Color Themes 251 connectivity support 364 Copy Count settings 202 Ctrl-D settings 261 destination support 373 Device Settings tab 256 Document Options 203, 233 document preview image 223, 227, 238, 253 duplexing 233 Edge Control 250 Effects tab 225 features 195, 374 finishing options 373 Finishing tab 232 Flip Pages Up 236 Font DIMM Installer 258 font settings 262 Font Substitution Table 257 font support 374 Form to Tray Assignment 257 Graphic setting 203 Halftone settings 251 Help feature support 367 Help system 199 HP Digital Imaging Options 223 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36 Image Color Management (ICM) 203 included 27 Installable Options settings 262 installable options support 366 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 Job-storage settings 240 job-storage support 369 Layout Options 206 localized versions 13 media supported 339 ENWW Mopier settings 263 Neutral Grays 251 operating systems supported 10 Output Protocol settings 260 Pages per Sheet 237 Paper Options 212 paper supported 368 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PJL encoding 363 PostScript Device settings 260 PostScript Memory settings 260 PostScript Options 204 PostScript Passthrough 264 preconfiguration support 365 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Properties tabs 198 quality settings 370 raster compression 206 reordering options 370 Resizing Options settings 226 resizing options support 371 Scale to Fit 226 Services tab 254, 367 timeout settings 261 tray assignment 366 TrueType font settings 203 user interface support 367 Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 372 PS files, command-line printing 357 Q quality, driver support 370 Quick Copy job settings PCL traditional drivers 142 PS Emulation Driver 180 unidrivers 244 Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick Sets R raster compression PCL unidrivers 206 PS Emulation Unidriver 206 Ready to Create Installer dialog box 307 Ready to Install dialog box, Windows 292 regional versions, CD-ROMs 12 Registration dialog box, Windows 297 releasing job-storage jobs 144, 187, 247 remote firmware updates about 344 determining current firmware level 344 downloading 344 FTP, Windows 348 HP Web Jetadmin 355 LPR commands 355 Macintosh 82, 349, 353 messages 345 troubleshooting 345 UNIX 353 verifying installation 346 Windows network 352 Windows, using local port 350 Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh 88 reordering options 370 Resizing Options driver support 371 unidriver settings 226 resolution driver support 370 PCL traditional driver settings 113, 115 PS Emulation Driver settings 172 Restrict Color screen, HP Printer Utility 90 Restrict Color, HP Embedded Web Server 69 RFU. See remote firmware updates RGB settings PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 182 unidrivers 252 RTF files, viewing 19 Index 387 S Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature 113, 115 Scale to Fit setting PCL traditional drivers 117 unidrivers 226 Scaling control, PS Emulation Driver 173 screen-readable documentation 19 Searching dialog box, Windows 279 Security page, HP Embedded Web Server 65, 68 Send Ctrl-D settings 193, 261 Send TrueType as Bitmaps PCL traditional drivers 113, 114 PCL unidrivers 205 serial number 60 Services tab 254, 367 Set Port Name dialog box, Windows 287 settings continuous export 36 locking 35 overriding 95, 195 Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers 102 Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers 208 Settings tab, HP Embedded Web Server 64 silent installation command-line 311 Customization Wizard 298 sizes, paper commands 341 custom 342 margins 341 PCL Traditional Driver settings 125 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 233 Print on Both sides, PCL traditional drivers 106 PS Emulation Driver settings 167 supported 339 unidriver settings 213 388 Index sleep mode 4 smart duplexing 233 Source is settings PCL traditional drivers 130 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 215 sources, paper. See trays Specify Printer dialog box, Windows 285 speed specifications 4 sRGB settings PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 182 unidrivers 252 standalone drivers 8 status devices 61 Macintosh supplies 76, 89 supplies 60 storage, job enabling in PCL traditional drivers 161 Macintosh 85 operating systems supported 369 PCL traditional drivers 138 PS Emulation Driver 179, 189 unidriver settings 240, 263 Stored job settings PCL traditional drivers 142 unidrivers 244 substitution table for fonts, PS Emulation Driver 174 supplies AutoSend page, HP Embedded Web Server 65 features 6 Macintosh status 76, 89 ordering 26, 51 usage AutoSend page 65 viewing status 60 Support tab, HP Easy Printer Care 53 Support tab, HP Printer Utility 79 support, product 61 system requirements Macintosh and Linux 7 Windows 7 T TBCP output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 260 TCP/IP address, locating 59 Test Page dialog box, Windows 296 text files, command-line printing 357 text, printing all as black PCL traditional drivers 113, 115 unidriver 205 time settings, HP Embedded Web Server 65 timeout settings 191, 261 Toolbox, not supported 23 traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation Driver transparencies, paper type commands 343 trays Alternative Letterhead Mode 163, 205 autoconfiguration 31 custom paper sizes 129, 214 driver support 366 included 6, 339 Installable Options, PS Emulation Driver 188 Macintosh configuration 84 media supported 5, 341 paper source commands 339 paper type commands 343 PCL traditional driver settings 160 PS Emulation Driver settings 169 Source is settings, PCL traditional drivers 130 Source is settings, unidrivers 215 unidriver configuration 263 unidriver Form to Tray Assignment 257 troubleshooting File to E-mail utility 336 firmware upgrades 345 HP driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 37 ENWW Services tab, unidrivers 254 Troubleshooting Tools pane, HP Easy Printer Care 58 TrueType font settings PS Emulation Unidriver 262 Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional drivers 113, 114 Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers 205 substitution table, PS Emulation Driver 174 unidrivers 203 two-sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 106 PS Emulation Driver 170 unidriver settings 233 TXT files, command-line printing 357 Type is settings PCL traditional drivers 131 unidrivers 216 types, paper Include in application source list setting 164 PCL traditional drivers settings 131 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 233 Print on Both sides, PCL traditional drivers 106 supported 341 unidriver settings 216 U unattended installation command-line 311 Customization Wizard 298 unidrivers % of Normal Size 227 About tab 266 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 203 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 205 alternative source support 372 Automatic Configuration 262 ENWW automatic configuration 33 bidirectional communication support 364 bins supported 366 booklets 236 bundle support 365 Color tab 248 Color Themes 251 connectivity support 364 constraint messages 199 Copy Count settings 202 custom paper sizes 342 destination support 373 Device Settings tab 256 Document Options 203, 233 document preview image 223, 227, 238, 253 duplexing 233 Edge Control 250 Effects tab 225 features 195 finishing options 373 Finishing tab 232 Flip Pages Up 236 Font DIMM Installer 258 font settings 258 Font Substitution Table 258 font support 374 Form to Tray Assignment 257 Graphic setting 203 Halftone settings 251 Help feature support 367 Help system 199 HP Digital Imaging Options 223 HP Driver Preconfiguration 36 Image Color Management (ICM) 203 Installable Options settings 262 job stream output support 362 job tracking 363 Job-storage settings 240 job-storage support 369 Layout Options 206 media supported 339 Mopier settings 263 Neutral Grays 251 operating systems supported 10 Pages per Sheet 237 Paper Options 212 paper size commands 341 paper supported 368 paper type commands 343 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PCL 6 color raster compression support 362 PJL encoding 363 PostScript Options 204 PostScript Passthrough 264 preconfiguration support 365 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 368 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Properties tabs 198 quality settings 370 reordering options 370 Resizing Options settings 226 resizing options support 371 Scale to Fit 226 Services tab 254, 367 tray assignment 366 TrueType font settings 203 user interface support 367 Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 372 uninstallation HP Easy Printer Care 338 Macintosh printing system 327 units of measurement 130 UNIX operating systems direct printing 361 driver availability 9 print-ready printing 361 remote firmware update 353 Web site for 8 Unprintable Area, PS Emulation Driver 169 Unsupported Operating System dialog box, Windows 277 Update Now feature 32, 33, 164 Update screen, HP Easy Printer Care 57 updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update Index 389 usage page 60 Usage Report, HP Easy Printer Care 56 USB direct-connect installation 276 Use Different Paper, PCL traditional drivers 132 Use Different Paper/Covers, unidrivers 217 User Guide 19 User Name 143, 245 W Wait Timeout settings 191, 261 wake time, setting 4 Watermarks settings drivers supported 372 PCL traditional drivers 119 PS Emulation Driver 184, 185 unidrivers 228 Web Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin Web sites Adobe 166 downloading software 9 firmware download 344 HP Embedded Web Server links 61, 65 HP Embedded Web Server user guide 59 Linux product support 7 support links 26 UNIX model scripts 9 UNIX support 8 Welcome dialog box, Customization Wizard 300 Welcome dialog box, Windows Full Installation 277 What's this? Help PS Emulation Driver 166 unidrivers 199 Windows operating systems Add Printer installation 297 availability of software components 10 CD-ROM, print system 24 default printer, setting 312 dialog boxes 276 direct printing, FTP 357 direct printing, local port 359 390 Index direct printing, networks 361 directory structure, software CDROM 11 driver versions 28 Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 32 fonts supported 268 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 36 Installer Customization Wizard 298 installers 10 installing printing software 274 LPR commands 361 Point and Print installation 311 PS Emulation Driver features 165 PS emulation fonts supported 270 remote firmware update 350 supported 8 system requirements 7 unidriver features 195 ENWW © 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 416 Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:dd165647-b9f4-40a3-9d32-eede71008a13 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Keywords : Edition 1, 11/2005 Create Date : 2005:11:01 21:24:42Z Modify Date : 2005:11:15 07:49:51-07:00 Metadata Date : 2005:11:15 07:49:51-07:00 Creator Tool : XSL Formatter V3.2 MR3 Document ID : uuid:0b427762-e3e2-4317-9eaa-010ba35cb1d5 Format : application/pdf Creator : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Title : HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer Software Technical Reference, External - ENWW Author : HP LaserJet Information EngineeringEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools